JP2016067793A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving a ready-to-win performance based on a button operation.SOLUTION: The game machine includes pattern varying means for varying patterns of a pattern row that is dynamically displayed on the basis of the operation of operation means in the case that dynamic display means displays identification information in a ready-to-win display mode, determination means for determining a remaining period of a period displayed in the ready-to-win display mode, pattern variable discrimination means for discriminating whether the pattern varying means varies patterns to specific patterns within a period discriminated by the discrimination means, and specific performance setting means for setting a specific performance for displaying the specific patterns during a remaining period of the ready-to-win display mode in the case that the pattern variable discrimination means discriminates that the patterns are not variable to the specific patterns.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 77

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which an effect image is displayed based on a button operation in a reach effect (Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-066611 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement with respect to reach production based on button operations.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve reach production based on button operations.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information, and a privilege advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that the lottery result is a specific lottery result. In the gaming machine having the privilege granting means to be granted, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols, whereby the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. The dynamic display means displays in a reach display mode in which one of the plurality of symbol sequences is dynamically displayed, and displays the specific symbol sequence. Show lottery results A specific symbol to be combined is set and displayed, and an operation unit operable by a player, and the operation unit when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display unit By the symbol variable means for changing the symbol of the symbol sequence that is dynamically displayed, the determination means for determining the remaining period of the period displayed in the reach display mode, and the determination means Within the determined period, when the symbol variable means determines whether the symbol can be changed to the specific symbol, and when the symbol variable determining means determines that the symbol cannot be changed to the specific symbol And a specific effect setting means for setting a specific effect for displaying the specific symbol in the remaining period of the reach display mode.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the reach effect based on the button operation can be improved, and the interest of the player can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a game board and a board surface lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a game board and a board surface lower unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a game board and a board surface lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a back disassembled perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is a top view of the variable winning device, (b) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (c) is a side view of the variable winning device in the direction of arrow XVc in FIG. 15 (b). is there. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus in the XVIa-XVIa line | wire of FIG.15 (b), (b) is the variable prize-winning apparatus after sliding the movable upper cover member from FIG.16 (a). It is sectional drawing. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a game board. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the board surface lower unit along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (b), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the board surface lower unit along the line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. (C) is sectional drawing of the board surface lower unit which changed the arrangement | positioning of the light irradiation part virtually from FIG.18 (b). It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a back perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a body member, a shielding member, and a swinging member. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of a body member, a shielding member, and a swinging member. (A) is a front view of a 1st guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of a 1st guide arm, (c) is the 1st guide arm in the XXVc-XXVc line | wire of Fig.25 (a). FIG. 25D is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm taken along line XXVd-XXVd in FIG. (A) is a front view of the 2nd guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of the 2nd guide arm, (c) is the 2nd guide arm in the XXVIc-XXVIc line of Drawing 26 (a). (D) is sectional drawing of the 2nd guide arm in the XXVId-XXVId line | wire of Fig.26 (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st guide arm, a 2nd guide arm, and wiring. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. FIG. 29 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit taken along line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. 28. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the compound operation unit in the XXXV-XXXV line of FIG. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the compound operation unit in the XXXVII-XXXVII line of FIG. It is a front perspective view of a rocking | fluctuation operation unit. It is a back perspective view of a rocking | fluctuation operation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a rocking | fluctuation operation unit. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of a rocking | swiveling operation unit. (A) is a front view of a rocking | swiveling operation unit, (b) is a side view of the rocking | swiveling operation unit in the arrow XXXIIb direction view of Fig.42 (a). It is a front view of a rocking | fluctuation operation unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the drive side arm member in the XXXIVa-XXXXIVa line of FIG. 43, a driven side arm member, and a 1st bridge member, (b) is the drive side arm in the XXXIVb-XXXIVb line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of a member, a driven side arm member, and a 2nd bridge member. (A) is a partial side view of the swing operation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXXVa in FIG. 43, and (b) and (c) are diagrams in which the driven arm member is bent from the state of FIG. 45 (a) to the front side. It is a partial side view of the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit which showed the mode to show in time series. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the driving side arm member and the driven side arm member taken along the line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. 43. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the rocking | swiveling operation unit in the XXXV-XXXXV line | wire of FIG. It is a front view of a drive side arm member and a driven side arm member. It is a front view of a drive side arm member and a driven side arm member. It is a front view of a drive side arm member and a driven side arm member. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (c) is a front view of the swinging operation unit in the third embodiment, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the swinging operation unit along line Ld-Ld in FIG. 52 (b). It is a front view of the compound operation unit in a 4th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view of the compound operation unit in a 5th embodiment. (A) to (c) is a partial rear view of the combined operation unit. It is a partial front view of the compound operation unit in a 6th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a compound operation unit. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 61 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line LXI-LXI in FIG. 60. (A) is a front view of the 1st guide arm in 9th Embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of the 1st guide arm, (c) is a perspective view of a desorption front locking member. . (A) is a front view of the 2nd guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of the 2nd guide arm, (c) is the 2nd guide arm in the LXIIIc-LXIIIc line of Drawing 63 (a). FIG. (A) And (b) is a front view of the 1st guide arm and 2nd guide arm of a wiring guide arm, (c) is the 1st of the wiring guide arm in the LXIVc-LXIVc line | wire of Fig.64 (a). It is sectional drawing of a guide arm and a 2nd guide arm. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen of super background notice, (b) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen when the screen of (a) is scroll-displayed in the horizontal direction in super background notice. . (A) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen in which the special image was displayed in the super background notice, and (b) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen which suggests shifting to the background in the door in the super background notice. It is. (A) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen in which the aspect of a disparity is displayed in super reach A, (b) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the aspect screen of double reach in super reach A. . (A) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen displayed in super reach A, (b) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen displayed in super reach A. (A) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen displayed in super reach A, (b) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen displayed in super reach A. It is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen at the time of a big hit in super reach A. (A) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen displayed in a jackpot effect, (b) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen displayed in a jackpot effect. (A) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen displayed in a jackpot effect, (b) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen displayed in a jackpot effect. (A) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen displayed in a jackpot effect, (b) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen displayed in a jackpot effect. (A) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the timing of the effect performed in the super reach B, (b) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the timing of the effect performed in the super reach B. (A) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the timing of the effect performed in the super reach B, (b) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the timing of the effect performed in the super reach B. (A) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen displayed in super reach B, (b) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen displayed in super reach B. (A) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen displayed in super reach B, (b) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen displayed in super reach B. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a main controller. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot determination value. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table, and (d) is a judgment value per second random number counter C4 and a normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of these. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a fluctuation pattern selection table provided in a ROM in the main controller, and (b) shows the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of big hit. It is the schematic diagram shown typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the fluctuation | variation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation | variation classification at the time of disconnection (normal), (d) is at the time of disconnection It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of variation classification counter CS1 and variation classification in (probability variation). (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the data table storage area provided in RAM in a display control apparatus. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the mass setting table storage area provided in RAM in a display control apparatus, (b) is the normal mass setting provided in the mass setting table storage area It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuation mass setting table provided in the mass setting table storage area. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed SW input monitoring and the production | presentation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the super-background operation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot operation processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the operation process at the time of super reach B performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the super background effect process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the reach related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the super reach B process for display performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the map setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the background image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed SW related command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed SW process in the super background performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot SW process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a counter performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. Update processing. (A) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the timing of the production performed in the super reach B in the modification of a 1st control example, (b) is performed in the super reach B in the modification of a 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram illustrating the timing of the production. (A) is the schematic diagram which illustrated the screen displayed in the super reach B in the modification of a 1st control example, (b) is the screen displayed in the super reach B in the modification of a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which illustrated this. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the data table storage area provided in RAM in the display control apparatus in the modification of a 1st control example. It is the operation process at the time of super reach B performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the display super reach B process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the modification of a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the frame button and the selection switch typically.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 50, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63 and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like. The first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable winning device 330 are formed in the board surface lower unit 300 fitted into a receiving opening 60a of the base plate 60 described later.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, aiming at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or setting the second winning port 640 by “left-handed”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is disposed below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done. The details of the variable prize winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) for opening and closing the specific prize winning opening 65a will be described later. Briefly, the moving upper lid member 332 of the variable prize winning device 330 slides to move the specific prize winning opening 65a. Opened and closed.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 314. A sphere that flows down the game area and has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 314. A pair of out ports 314 are arranged on the left and right of the specific winning port 65a.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and fluctuating effects (variation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, a selection switch 270 (up switch 270a, right switch 270b, and lower switch 270c. , Left switch 270d), determination switch 270e, and the like are connected to each other. Other devices 228 include drive motors 433, 462, 551 and solenoid 474.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, the housing structure of the units 400 and 500 in the back case 210 will be described.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 as viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 is opened on one side (the front side in FIG. 6) from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 211a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 thereof. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The left and right and upper outer wall portions 212 include an intermediate wall portion 212a formed in parallel with the bottom wall portion 211 in the middle in the front-rear direction, and a fastening portion 212b capable of fastening a member to the intermediate wall portion 212a. On the near side of the intermediate wall portion 212a, the outer wall portion 212 extends from the end opposite to the opening 211a of the intermediate wall portion 212a, and on the back side of the intermediate wall portion 212a, the outer wall portion 212 is the intermediate wall portion. It extends from the end of 212a close to the opening 211a.

  Note that the holding and fixing portion 446 and the fixing plate 461 are fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 212b formed on the left and right intermediate wall portions 212a, and the guide plate 424 is provided on the fastening portion 212b formed on the upper intermediate wall portion 212a. Is fastened and fixed.

  Here, the fixing plate 461 is a member that supports a driving motor 462 that generates a driving force that drives the composite operation unit 400, and the holding and fixing portion 446 is a member that fixes one end of the biasing spring 445, and the guide plate 424. Is a member for guiding the movement of the connecting member 423 (see FIG. 20) of the combined operation unit 400. In other words, all of them are not direct portions visually recognized by the player, but are portions having a supplementary role of directing that generates the driving force of the operation of the composite operation unit 400 or guides the operation. .

  By arranging the fixing plate 461, the holding fixing portion 446, and the guide plate 424 having such a role near the front side of the back case 210, a space near the back side of the back case 210 can be made free. By using this empty space closer to the rear side as a space for retreating the part that is actually visually recognized by the player, such as the shielding member 420, the constituent members of the composite operation unit 400 can be stacked in the front and rear, and the opening 211a The width required for retracting the composite operation unit 400 to the outside can be reduced. Therefore, the formation width of the bottom plate portion 211 can be reduced. Thereby, the opening 211a can be expanded and the formation range of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be expanded.

  The operation unit 200 is configured such that the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 are accommodated in the internal space of the back case 210, respectively.

  Specifically, the composite operation unit 400 is disposed on the left and right and the upper part of the region formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210, and the swing operation unit 500 is arranged inside the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210. It is arrange | positioned under the area | region which a side surface forms (refer FIG. 5).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9, an outline of operation modes of the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 7 to 9, FIGS. 5 and 6 are appropriately referred to.

  7 to 9 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 7 shows a state in which the main body member 410 of the combined operation unit 400 is arranged at the extended position, and FIG. 8 shows a state in which the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 is arranged at the extended position. A state in which the main body member 410 of the combined operation unit 400 and the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 are arranged at the overhanging position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the combined operation unit 400 operates the main body member 410 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. That is, in the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the main body member 410 is retracted above the opening 211a of the back case 210 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 7, the main body member 410 is lowered, and the main body member 410 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (ie, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). . As will be described later, the combined operation unit 400 is a unit in which the shielding member 420 performs two types of operations (sliding operation and swinging operation) having different movement modes as the main body member 410 slides.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the swing operation unit 500 operates the moving member 540 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the moving member 540 is retracted below the opening 211a of the back case 210 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the overhang position shown in FIG. 8, the moving member 540 is raised, and the moving member 540 is disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). . The moving member 540 is formed as a pair of left and right, and the pair of left and right moving members 540 are united and visually recognized at the extended position shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9, both the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be arranged at the overhang position. In this case, the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be visually recognized as a single decorative member (partially overlapped in front view), and a decorative member having a width equal to or larger than the width outside the opening 211a is formed. be able to. Thereby, the effect of the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be improved. Further, by projecting the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 toward the center of the opening 211a in different directions (downward and upward), for example, compared to the case where all the movable members are extended in the same direction, The distance that each member moves from the retracted position to the extended position can be shortened. Thereby, when the movement speeds of the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 are the same, the period of movement from the retracted position to the extended position can be shortened.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18, the board surface lower unit 300 disposed in the lower part of the game board 13 will be described. 10 and 11 are front exploded perspective views of the game board 13 and the board surface lower unit 300, and FIG. 12 is a rear exploded perspective view of the game board 13 and the board lower unit 300. 10 shows a state in which only the front plate member 320 is disassembled from the game version 13, and in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the front unit 310 and the variable prize winning device 330 of the board surface lower unit 300 are further played from FIG. It is disassembled from the board 13. In order to facilitate understanding, the game board 13 is illustrated in a simplified manner.

  As shown in FIG. 10, a specific winning opening 65 a is formed along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed in a downwardly convex curved shape, the arrangement position of the specific winning opening 65a is set as compared with the case where the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed by a straight line along the left-right direction. Can be lowered downward. The outer edge of the specific winning opening 65 a is formed with the upper lid member 332 on the upper side, the lower edge with the lower edge of the inner rail 61, and the left and right sides with the left and right walls of the opening upper side 313. .

  As will be described later, the specific winning opening 65a is switched between the above-mentioned closed state and open state by the sliding movement of the movable upper cover member 332 back and forth, and the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is, for example, 15 It can be repeated (15 rounds).

  As shown in FIG. 11, the board surface lower unit 300 is a unit that constitutes an out port 314 through which a ball is discharged and a specific winning port 65a, and is received at the lower part of the game board 13 in the front-rear direction. A front unit 310 that is fitted into the opening 60a from the front side and fastened and fixed thereto, a front plate member 320 that is fastened and fixed to the front unit 310 from the front side and a path of a sphere is formed on the back side, and a receiving opening 60a It is mainly provided with a variable winning device 330 that is fitted from the back side and fastened and fixed, and includes a movable upper lid member 332 that changes the flow direction of the sphere.

  The front unit 310 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 311 formed so that a sphere can flow down on the front side, and an electric accessory 640a in which a pair of members are opened and closed in the center on the front side of the main body plate portion 311. The plate-shaped inclined plate portion 312 protruding from the front side at the left and right upper portions of the main body plate portion 311, the upper opening portion 313 recessed from the lower bottom portion of the main body plate portion 311, and the upper opening portion thereof It mainly includes a pair of out ports 314 that are drilled in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the portion 313 and from which the balls are discharged out of the game area.

  The main body plate portion 311 is formed in the front-rear direction at a position surrounded by the first winning port lower side 311a that forms the lower side of the first winning port 64 and is formed above the electric winning combination 640a and the pair of members of the electric winning combination 640a. A second winning port 640 provided, a light irradiation device 311b that is disposed below the second winning port 640 and illuminates the front side of the second winning port 640, and is directed to the front side in a rib shape outside the out port 314 And a ball-flowing rib 311c that is provided in a protruding manner.

  The light irradiation device 311b is housed in the housing recess 323a (see FIG. 12) of the front plate member 320 and is directed upward (the second winning port 640 side) due to the ball winning in the second winning port 640. LED member that is irradiated with light.

  The ball flow rib 311c adjusts the flow direction of the sphere rolling along the inner rail 61, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The inclined plate portion 312 is formed such that a ball can roll on the upper side surface, and is disposed on the upper left and right sides of the electric accessory 640a, and is inclined downward as the electric accessory 640a comes closer. As a result, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state where it falls to the left and right, the ball that rolls down by the inclined plate portion 312 can be awarded to the second prize opening 640 with high probability. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the ball that flows down by rolling the inclined plate portion 312 can be dropped to the front side of the upper opening portion 313 with high probability.

  The opening upper part 313 is formed to be inclined upward as it goes to the left and right center. Here, the vertical width of the left and right wall portions of the upper opening portion 313 (corresponding to the left and right wall portions of the specific winning port 65a) is set such that the vertical width of the central portion in the left-right direction of the specific winning port 65a is equal to or greater than the diameter of the sphere. ) Can be set to a length equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 17). In this case, although it is difficult to win a ball from the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a, the ball flows down along the inner rail 61 to the central portion of the game board 13, and the central portion in the left and right direction of the specific winning opening 65a. Since it is possible to win, the game can be continued.

  Here, when the upper and lower side surfaces of the specific prize opening 65a are parallel surfaces (planes extending in the left-right direction), the straight line intersecting the inner rail 61 is the same as the length of the lower side surface of the specific prize opening 65a. It is necessary to arrange the specific winning opening 65a from the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Therefore, the position of the specific winning opening 65a is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lower side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is curved like the lower side surface of the inner rail 61, it is not necessary to raise the specific winning opening 65a, and the specific winning opening 65a is positioned at a low position. Can be arranged.

  In addition, since the upper side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is inclined downward as it approaches the left and right ends, the ball toward the specific winning opening 65a is compared with the case where the upper side surface is formed by a plane extending in the left and right direction. Can be lowered. Thereby, the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered.

  The out port 314 is formed as a pair on the left and right sides of the upper opening portion 313, and the lower side of the out port 314 is disposed below the left and right ends of the upper opening portion 313, and the upper side of the out port 314 is disposed above. The That is, the opening upper part 313 is formed below the out port 314. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning of the variable prize-winning apparatus 330 mentioned later can be lowered | hung below, and the lower edge of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be lowered | hung. Even in such an arrangement, in this embodiment, the sphere is caused to flow down on the upper surface of the movable upper cover member 332 that has an upper surface substantially the same shape as the shape of the upper opening portion 313 and is slid in the front-rear direction. Is discharged to the out port 314 (see FIG. 17), the game can be continued.

  The front plate member 320 is a plate-like member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is disposed on the front side of the front unit 310 and formed so that a sphere can flow between the main body plate portion 311. A plate-like main body plate portion 321, a first winning port front portion 322 that is disposed at the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 321 and guides a ball to the lower side 311 a of the first winning port, and an electric accessory 640 a. The electric support lower supporting portion 323, the lower lower plate 324 disposed along the lower surface of the outer port 314, and the rear side of the main body plate 321 along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. And a ball feeding unit 325.

  The main body plate portion 321 is provided with a ball flow rib 321a that is projected in a rib shape on the back side outside the out-out lower plate 324. The ball flow rib 321a adjusts the flow direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The electric accessory lower support portion 323 includes an accommodation recess 323a which is a horizontally elongated recess, and the light irradiation device 311b is accommodated in the accommodation recess 323a.

  The out mouth lower plate 324 is provided with a thin rib extending in the front-rear direction on the upper side surface in the left-right direction. Further, the out-out lower plate 324 includes a stepped portion 324a that protrudes upward at the left and right inner ends. The sphere that has flowed down can be decelerated by the unevenness formed on the upper side surface of the lower plate 324. Moreover, the rib formed in the out mouth lower plate 324 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back side. Thereby, the speed | rate which discharges | releases the ball | bowl which has flowed down to the out port 314 can be improved.

  Since the inclined plate portion 312 described above is formed immediately above the out-out lower plate 324 (see FIG. 17), the ball that falls after rolling the inclined plate portion 312 faces the out-out lower plate 324. Falling is suppressed. That is, a ball that falls after rolling on the inclined plate portion 312 falls on the inner side in the left-right direction of the pair of out-out lower plates 324 (position where the moving upper lid member 332 is disposed), or on the out-out lower plate 324. Either it falls to the outer end (near the ball flow rib 321a and the boundary position between the rib formation range and the rail through which the ball flows). These are both outside the rib forming range. Thereby, it can suppress that a ball | bowl falls from the high place to the out mouth lower board 324, and the durability of the out mouth lower board 324 can be improved.

  The step portion 324a is a step formed between the out port 314 and the specific winning port 65a, and a sphere that flows down from the left and right direction and flows down the upper side surface of the out port lower plate 324 exceeds the step portion 324a. Thus, it is prevented from flowing down to the center in the left-right direction (see FIG. 17). In other words, the sphere that flows down from the left-right direction and flows down the upper side surface of the out-out lower plate 324 is guided exclusively to the out-out port 314.

  The ball feeding unit 325 mainly includes a back side surface 325a formed on the back side, and a left and right side surface 325b connected to the back side surface 325a and formed on the left and right sides.

  The back side surface 325a is inclined downward toward the back side, and the left and right side surfaces 325b are inclined toward the center toward the back side. Thereby, the flow direction of the sphere that has reached the ball feeding portion 325 can be directed to the back side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from staying in front of the specific winning opening 65a and to prevent so-called over winning.

  Next, the variable winning device 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 330, FIG. 14 is a rear exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 15A is a top view of the variable winning device 330. 15 (b) is a front view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 15 (c) is a side view of the variable winning device 330 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVc in FIG. 15 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the variable winning device 330 includes a main body member 331 that forms a skeleton, and a movable upper lid member 332 that is inserted into the main body member 331 from the front and is slidable in the front-rear direction. A rear cover member 334 that houses a solenoid 333 that generates a driving force for sliding the moving upper cover member 332 and a lever member 334b that is swung by the solenoid 333 and that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 331. And mainly.

  The main body member 331 is provided with a deformed through hole 331a through which the movable upper lid member 332 is inserted, a lower passage 331b through which a ball won in the specific winning opening 65a flows down, and is disposed below the lower passage 331b and directed upward. A light irradiating device 331c that irradiates light and a back side accommodation portion 331d that is a recess formed on the back side toward the front side and that accommodates the solenoid 333, the lever member 334b, and the like. .

  The deformed through-hole 331a is a through-hole formed along the shape of the movable upper lid member 332 as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, and accommodates the front plate portion 332a. It mainly includes an opening 331a1 and a rear opening 331a2 that accommodates the rear plate 332b.

  The front opening 331a1 is a hollow formed in a pentagonal shape in which the lower side extends horizontally in front view, is inclined upward as the upper side goes to the center, and the left and right sides extend vertically.

  The rear opening 331a2 is an opening that is drilled in a shape in which the left and right portions of the front opening 331a1 are cut off from the center of the rear side of the front opening 331a1. That is, the outer shape of the lower side and the upper side of the rear opening 331a2 and the outer shape of the lower side and the upper side of the front opening 331a are not formed in the front-rear direction but are formed at surface positions. Thereby, the movable upper cover member 332 can be smoothly guided.

  The lower passage 331b is formed as a pair of left and right so that a sphere can pass (see FIG. 18A), and is formed to protrude downward from the lower edge of the inner rail 61. A sensor S for detecting the passage of the sensor is disposed (see FIG. 15B).

  The light irradiation device 331c is a device that produces an effect by illuminating the lower passage 331b, the plate-like portion 332a1, and the like with light, and is disposed below the inner rail 61 (below the receiving opening 60a). As a result, the devices necessary for the light irradiation device 331c can be disposed below the inner rail 61, so that a space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) can be lowered.

  The light irradiation device 331c includes a light irradiation unit 331c1 that emits light. The light irradiation unit 331c1 is formed as a pair of right and left directly below the lower passage 331b and irradiates light upward.

  The rear side accommodating portion 331d communicates with the front opening 331a1 with the rear opening 331a2 interposed therebetween.

  The movable upper cover member 332 is a long member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a front plate portion 332a accommodated in the front opening 331a1, and a rear plate portion 332b accommodated in the rear opening 331a2. A central rib 332c projecting downward along the central axis of the front plate portion 332a and the rear plate portion 332b, and a connecting hole 332d drilled in the vertical direction at the rear side end of the rear plate portion 332b. Prepare mainly.

  The front plate portion 332a is formed in a plate-like portion 332a1 formed in a manner of rising and inclining toward the central portion in the left-right direction along the shape of the upper side of the front opening 331a1, and the plate-like portion 332a1 is formed in the vertical direction. And a guide rib 332a3 projecting downward at the left and right end portions of the plate-like portion 332a1 and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The plate-like portion 332a1 includes a front inclined side surface 332a1f formed to be inclined toward the back side as it goes downward (see FIG. 16) and recessed toward the back side as it goes toward the center in the left-right direction. The front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be recessed toward the rear side toward the center in the left-right direction, so that when the ball is sandwiched between the front plate member 320 and the front inclined side surface 332a1f, the ball can flow toward the center side. It is possible to prevent the sliding operation of the moving upper lid member 332 from being disturbed by the ball.

  Since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed as a portion that reflects light, as will be described later, a metal film is formed on the front inclined side surface 332a1f or mirror-finished to effectively reflect light. You may do it. In the present embodiment, a tape that reflects light is attached.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 15), the guide rib 332a3 is formed along the left and right side surfaces of the front opening 331a1 and is in contact with the lower side surface of the front opening 331a1. Thereby, the position shift of the left-right direction at the time of the sliding movement of the movement upper cover member 332 can be suppressed.

  The center rib 332c is formed at a bent portion of the front plate portion 332a formed by bending the plate shape. Thereby, the rigidity of the front side board part 332a can be improved. Further, when the movable upper lid member 332 is slid forward (when the movable upper lid member 332 of the variable winning device 330 is in a retracted state), the movable upper lid member 332 is held on the back side of the upper opening portion 313. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the moving upper lid member 332 from malfunctioning due to the collision between the central rib 332c and the sphere.

  The connecting hole 332d is a through hole through which the connecting portion 334b4 of the lever member 334b is inserted, and the displacement due to the swinging of the lever member 334b is transmitted to the movable upper cover member 332 (see FIG. 16).

  The solenoid 333 mainly includes a main body 333a serving as a driving source and a hook-shaped hook-shaped member 333b that is disposed below the main body 333a and is moved up and down below the lever member 334b.

  The rear cover member 334 mainly includes a plate-like main body portion 334a and a lever member 334b that is pivotally supported by the main body portion 334a so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

  The lever member 334b includes a main body portion 334b1 extending in the vertical direction, a pair of shaft portions 334b2 protruding in a columnar shape in both left and right directions at the lower end portion of the main body portion 334b1, and supported by the main body portion 334a. At a substantially intermediate position between the pair of shaft portions 334b2, a lower claw portion 334b3 extending below the main body portion 334b1 and capable of accommodating the bowl-shaped member 333b between the main body portion 334b1 and an upper end portion of the main body portion 334b1 And a connecting portion 334b4 that bulges into a columnar shape.

  Next, the sliding movement of the movable upper lid member 332 will be described with reference to FIG. 16A is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 330 along the line XVIa-XVIa in FIG. 15B, and FIG. 16B slides the moving upper lid member 332 from the state of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize apparatus 330 after having made it. 16A illustrates a retracted state in which the movable upper lid member 332 is disposed rearward, and FIG. 16B illustrates an overhanging state in which the movable upper lid member 332 is disposed forward, In order to facilitate understanding of the path E1, the central rib 332c is partially omitted. Further, in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the inner rail 61 and the front plate member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2) are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the movable upper lid member 332 forms a retracted state, the hook-shaped member 333b is disposed upward, and the lever member 334b is tilted backward. In this state, the ball can flow down in front of the variable winning device 330, that is, the ball can be won (opened) in the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 10 and 17).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the movable upper lid member 332 forms an extended state, the lever member 334b is pushed forward about the shaft portion 334b2 by pressing the hook-shaped member 333b downward, and the rear surface The upper cover member 332 is slid and moved to the front side while being in contact with the side surface of the side accommodating portion 331b. In this state, the ball cannot be won (closed) at the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 10 and 17).

  In this case, the back side surface of the lower end portion of the hook-shaped member 333b is brought into contact with the end portion of the lower claw portion 334b3 of the lever member 334b in the front-rear direction, so that the swinging of the lever member 334b is mechanically restricted. (The hook-shaped member 333b is disposed in the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3, and the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3 and the moving direction of the hook-shaped member 333b are orthogonal to each other). Accordingly, the driving force of the solenoid 333 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the swing of the lever member 334b is stopped by the driving force of the solenoid 333.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the path | route of the light irradiated from the light irradiation apparatus 331c is demonstrated.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, the light irradiated upward from the light irradiation unit 331c1 reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate-like portion 332a1 along the path E1. To do. At this time, the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be inclined toward the back side as it goes downward, so that the light that has been irradiated from below and reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f is reflected toward the front (player side). In this case, the player can visually recognize the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the moving upper lid member 332 as if it is emitting light. Further, since the light reflected by the front inclined side surface 332a1f is projected into the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320, the front plate member 320 can be noted. Thereby, the production capability of the movable upper lid member 332 and the front plate member 320 can be improved.

  Here, when an LED or the like is disposed on the movable upper lid member 332 to cause the movable upper lid member 332 to emit light, the movable upper lid member 332 may be increased in size. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the LED is not disposed on the moving upper lid member 332, the ability of the moving upper lid member 332 as an effect portion is improved while suppressing an increase in the size of the moving upper lid member 332. Can do.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, when the movable upper lid member 332 is in the overhanging state, the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1 upward along the path E2 and traveling toward the front inclined side surface 332a1f It does not reach the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate-like portion 332a1 by being shielded by the. In this case, the light irradiated along the path E1 from the light irradiation part 331c1 reaches the intermediate position of the plate-like part 332a1 of the front side plate part 332a and is transmitted as it is. Therefore, the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 are used. Is seen darkly by the player.

  That is, whether the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1 reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f changes depending on whether the movable upper cover member 332 is in the retracted state or the extended state, and the front plate It changes whether the light projection range E0 of the member 320 is visually recognized brightly. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not it is possible to win a ball at the specific winning opening 65a by confirming the brightness state of the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f or the front plate member 320.

  Accordingly, as in the present embodiment, since the movable upper lid member 332 slides back and forth, even when it is difficult to grasp the change in the state of the movable upper lid member 332 in front view (FIGS. 17A and 17B). )), It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is possible to win a ball in the specific winning opening 65a by the change in the brightness of the light projection range E0.

  Here, the movable upper lid member 332 is operated to form a closed state that prevents the passage of the ball to the specific winning port 65a and an open state that allows the passage of the ball to the specific winning port 65a ( The brightness state of the light projection range E0 is changed only by the forward / backward slide movement). In other words, since the state of the light projection range E0 is changed only by the operation required for the moving upper cover member 332 to continue the game, no additional mechanism is required. In other words, the movable upper lid member 332 can be used for both the purpose of switching whether or not the sphere can pass through the specific winning opening 65a and the purpose of performing the effect by the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1.

  In addition, when the sphere passes through the lower passage 331b, the light may be reflected by the sphere so that the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c is reflected. In this case, the vicinity of the inner rail 61 (below the light projection range E0 in FIGS. 16A and 17B) can be illuminated brightly in a front view.

  With reference to FIG. 17, the flow of the sphere in the case where the movable upper lid member 332 forms the extended state and the case where the retracted state is formed will be described. FIGS. 17A and 17B are partial front views of the game board 13. 17A shows a case where the movable upper lid member 332 forms an extended state (see FIG. 16B), and in FIG. 17B, the movable upper lid member 332 is in a retracted state (FIG. 16). 17A is shown, and in FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B, the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is illustrated by an imaginary line. In FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B, whether or not the movable upper lid member 332 is overhanging is shown by the presence or absence of shading. That is, in FIG. 17 (a) and FIG. 17 (b), the portion where the hatching is formed is in contact with the front plate member 320 or the front plate to the extent that the passage of the sphere with the front plate member 320 is blocked. This is a portion close to the member 320.

  In the state shown in FIG. 17A, the sphere falling on the path C <b> 2 flows down along the upper side surface of the moving upper lid member 332 and is discharged to the out port 314. In this case, the moving upper lid member 332 may fall down due to the weight of the sphere, and as a result, when the left and right ends of the moving upper lid member 332 are moved below the stepped portion 324a, the sphere is discharged to the out port 314. It becomes impossible and it will interfere with the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the movable upper cover member 332 is several times as long as the length protruding to the front side of the deformed through hole 331a (about four times longer, see FIG. 16B). It is accommodated in the modified through-hole 331a and is formed so as to be able to contact the side surface of the modified through-hole 331a in the vertical direction across the front and rear direction of the variable winning device 330. Therefore, by reducing the clearance between the moving upper lid member 332 and the deformed through-hole 331a, it is possible to suppress the moving upper lid member 332 from falling down due to the weight of the ball colliding with the moving upper lid member 332. Thus, the left and right end portions of the movable upper cover member 332 can be formed at the surface position with the step portion 324a, and the nail to the specific winning opening 65a can be lowered downward, so that the bottom of the third symbol display device 81 The edge can be lowered downward.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, in the case where the movable upper lid member 332 forms a retracted state, the sphere can flow down toward the specific winning opening 65a. At this time, the sphere rolling along the inner rail 61 from the left and right along the path C1 collides with the stepped portion 324a and is discharged to the out port 314. Therefore, the sphere falls along the path C2 from above toward the specific winning port 65a. Rolls on the inner rail 61 and reaches the specific winning opening 65a.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the vertical width of the left and right end portions of the specific winning opening 65a is formed to be equal to or smaller than the diameter of the sphere. That is, the vertical distance from the inner rail 61 at the left and right ends of the movable upper lid member 332 is formed to be equal to or smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the height of the step portion 324a from the inner rail 61 can be reduced, and the arrangement of the out ports 314 through which the balls falling from the step portion 324a can be lowered.

  In this case, it is difficult for the ball to enter from the left and right end portions of the specific winning opening 65a (in addition, in this embodiment, the ball is blocked from the base plate 60). However, since the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed along the inner rail 61, the ball flowing down to the front side of the right and left end portions of the specific winning opening 65a is moved along the inner rail 61 toward the center of the game area by gravity. Then, the player enters the specific winning opening 65a. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed to be inclined rearward (see FIG. 16), it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 17).

  As a result, the movable upper cover member 332 that forms the upper side of the specific winning opening 65a is spaced apart from the inner rail 61 above the diameter of the sphere at least near the center of the game area (the vicinity where the inner rail 61 is disposed at the lowest position). Therefore, the arrangement position of the movable upper lid member 332 can be lowered. Therefore, compared with the case where it is necessary to separate upward from the inner rail 61 at a position other than the center of the inner rail 61 beyond the diameter of the sphere, the arrangement position of the variable winning device 330 can be lowered downward. Thereby, the space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be lowered downward.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the function of the ball flow ribs 311c and 321a and the ball feeding portion 325 and the fact that light is collected by the front inclined side surface 332a1f will be described. 18A is a cross-sectional view of the board surface lower unit 300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17B, and FIG. 18B is a board lower unit 300 taken along line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 18C is a cross-sectional view of the panel surface lower unit 300 in which the arrangement of the light irradiation units 331c1 is virtually changed from FIG. 18B.

  In FIG. 18A, the rolling path of the sphere is described as paths C1a, C1b, and C2a, and the moving upper cover member 332 in the retracted state is illustrated by an imaginary line. The moving upper lid member 332 is on the near side (upper side of FIG. 17B) than the cross section of FIG. 18A, and is not actually visible, but for the convenience of explanation, it is viewed in the vertical direction (FIG. 18 paper surface). In a state in which the positions of (viewed in the vertical direction) coincide with each other, it is shown by an imaginary line in FIG. Further, in FIG. 18B and FIG. 18C, three spheres flowing down the lower passage 331b are virtually illustrated.

  A path of a ball that rolls along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 11) from the left-right direction and is discharged to the out port 314 will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the sphere rolling from the left-right direction toward the center of FIG. 18A abuts on at least one of the ball flow rib 311c or the ball flow rib 321a. That is, the ball that rolls while abutting the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 abuts the ball flow rib 311c, and the ball that rolls while abutting the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is a ball flow rib. 321a abuts.

  Here, when the sphere comes into contact with the ball flow rib 311c, the velocity direction of the sphere is directed in the direction along the path C1a, and then comes into contact with the ball flow rib 321a. Therefore, regardless of whether the sphere rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 or the sphere rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320, the rolling sphere is lengthened. It can be brought into contact with the rib 321a.

  By causing a ball that rolls along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 11) to abut against the rib 321a, the velocity direction of the ball can be directed in the direction along the path C1b. In this case, the speed of the sphere can be directed to the back side (upper side in FIG. 18 (a)) before the sphere is arranged on the front side of the out port 314. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from when the ball is arranged on the front side of the out port 314 to when the ball is discharged from the game area, and to prevent the ball from staying on the front side of the out port 314. In addition, the opening width of the out port 314 can be suppressed. Thereby, when the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 10) and the out port 314 are arranged side by side, the arrangement of the specific winning port 65a can be lowered below the game area.

  The case where a sphere falls between the step parts 324a arranged in a pair of left and right will be described. In this case, the sphere that has fallen between the step portions 324a rolls toward the center in the left-right direction, and the sphere comes into contact with the left and right side surfaces 325b of the sphere feed portion 325 so that the speed direction of the sphere is along the path C2a. Change. Thereby, since it can suppress that a ball | bowl stays in the front side of the specific winning opening 65a (refer FIG. 10), an over winning can be suppressed.

  When the sphere flows down along the lower passage 331b and crosses the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the sphere blocks the light so that the light does not reach the front inclined side surface 332a1f. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball has won the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 17) based on whether the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320 are viewed brightly or darkly. it can.

  Accordingly, as in the present embodiment, the front plate member 320 formed of a light-transmitting resin material is disposed in front of the specific winning opening 65a, and the inside of the specific winning opening 65a is difficult to visually recognize. In addition, it can be confirmed that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a due to the change in brightness of the light projection range E0. Therefore, it is not necessary to remove the specific winning port 65a from diagonally above in order to confirm that a ball enters the specific winning port 65a, and the burden on the player can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the irradiation direction of the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect at an angle close to a right angle (see FIG. 18B). Therefore, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a as compared with the case where the sphere flows down in the light traveling direction (see FIG. 18C) or the sphere flows down along the light irradiation direction. The period during which the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b blocks light can be shortened. In other words, the period during which the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 is viewed brightly can be lengthened, and the rendering ability of the front side inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 can be ensured.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, when the light path E1 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect (cross) at an angle close to a right angle, the light path E1 is blocked by the sphere. Thereafter, the light is not blocked by the sphere around the passage of the sphere through the front end portion (right side of FIG. 18B) of the lower passage 331b (the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f).

  In this case, even if the spheres are connected and flow down the lower passage 331b, the path E1 is shielded for each sphere, so that the brightness change of the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f or the front plate member 320 is changed. By confirming, the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a can be confirmed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18C, when the light path E3 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b are in a parallel relationship, after the light path E3 is blocked by the sphere, When the sphere reaches the rear end of the lower passage 331b (left side of FIG. 18C, near the sensor S) and falls downward, the light is not blocked by the sphere (so that the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f). Become). That is, until that time, the light path E3 remains blocked by the sphere.

  In this case, when the spheres are connected and flow down the lower passage 331b, the light path E3 is blocked by the first sphere (the left sphere in FIG. 18C) as long as the sphere is arranged in the lower passage 331b. Further, after the first sphere falls downward from the rear end portion (left side of FIG. 18 (c)) of the lower passage 331b, the light path to the second sphere (right sphere of FIG. 18 (c)). E3 is blocked. In addition, when the second sphere falls from the rear end of the lower passage 331b and the next sphere (third sphere) enters the lower passage 331b, the light path to the sphere. E3 is blocked. In this way, the sphere continues to shield the light path E3, and the sphere is always visually recognized as dark while flowing down the lower passage 331b. That is, the number of changes in whether the light is viewed brightly or darkly does not necessarily match the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a, and the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a is not the same. Confirmation becomes difficult. In contrast, the present embodiment has the above-described advantages.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (a), the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be recessed toward the back side toward the center in the left-right direction, so that the light emitted from the pair of left and right light irradiation portions 331c1 is the front inclined side surface 332a1f. By being reflected, the light is condensed along the path E1 to the center of the front plate member 320, and reaches the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B).

  Here, in this embodiment, since the front plate member 320 is disposed on the front side of the movable upper lid member 332, the specific winning opening 65a can be hidden, while the front inclined side surface 332a1f is visible through the front plate member 320. Therefore, it may be difficult to grasp the change in brightness of the front inclined side surface 332a1f. In that case, it is necessary to increase the light intensity of a light emitting element such as an LED used for the light irradiation unit 331c1, and there is a problem that the light emitting elements that can be used for the light irradiation unit 331c1 are limited.

  On the other hand, the front inclined side surface 332a1f condenses the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 331c1 to the center of the front plate member 320, so that each of the light irradiated from the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is overlapped, The intensity of light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be improved. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in selecting a light emitting element that can be used for the light irradiation unit 331c1 (it is possible to select a light emitting element with low light intensity).

  Moreover, since the light irradiated from a pair of light irradiation part 331c1 is overlapped and visually recognized by front view (refer FIG.17 (b)), a pair of light irradiation is made by making light colors mutually differ. A total of three colors of light emitted from the part 331c1 and the combined color can be visually recognized in the projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B).

  Here, since the light irradiated from each of the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is shielded by a sphere that rolls along the path C2a independently (see FIG. 18), at the timing when the sphere shields the light, The color of the light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be switched variously.

  For example, in FIG. 18, a case is considered where “blue” light is emitted from the right light irradiation unit 331c1 and “red” light is emitted from the left light irradiation unit 331c1. In this case, when the movable upper cover member 332 is in the retracted state, light is emitted in the order of “blue”, “purple (overlapping portion)”, and “red” from the right side in the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B). Is visible.

  In this case, if the sphere rolls along the path C2a on the right side of FIG. 18 and shields the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the “blue” color light is shielded. Only “red” light is visible.

  On the other hand, when the sphere rolls along the path C2a on the left side of FIG. 18 and shields the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the “red” color light is shielded. Only “blue” light is visible.

  Thus, the mode of the light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be changed depending on which path the sphere rolls and which light irradiation unit 331c1 shields. The change in the light mode is caused by a sphere that flows down the game area along a random path while colliding with a nail or the like, so that the change in the light mode can be generated at a random timing. That is, as compared with the case where the change in the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 is caused by electronic control, it is possible to perform a more rich effect and improve the effect.

  In the present embodiment, the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed in a square shape as viewed from above, but may be formed in a parabolic shape in top view from the viewpoint of collecting light.

  Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  19 is a front perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. 20 is a rear perspective view of the composite operation unit 400. 19 and 20 illustrate a state in which the main body member 410 of the combined operation unit 400 is disposed at the retracted position, and the drive motor 462 and the fixed plate 461 are not illustrated. In the combined operation unit 400, the guide member 450 and the rear upper plate 470 are fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 210.

  FIG. 21 is a front exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. 22 is a rear exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the combined operation unit 400 is a horizontally long rectangular main body member 410 that is slidable in the vertical direction, and one end can be guided to the left and right ends of the main body member 410. A shield member 420 that is a pair of connected members and whose other ends are pivotally supported with each other, a swinging member 430 that is swingably disposed on the center front side of the main body member 410, and the main body member 410 A pair of leg members 440 that are fastened to both ends and extended in the vertical direction, a guide member 450 in which a guide hole 452 for guiding the leg member 440 is formed, and a driving force necessary for the movement of the leg member 440 are provided. A driving device 460 to be generated, a rear upper plate 470 fastened and fixed above the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and a connection between the rear upper plate 470 and the main body member 410 so that wiring is accommodated therein. Composed mainly comprises a guide arm 480, a.

  23 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swinging member 430. FIG. 24 is a rear exploded perspective view of the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swinging member 430.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the main body member 410 includes a plate-like base member 411 that is elongated in the left-right direction, and is drilled in the front-rear direction at the left and right end portions of the base member 411 so as to extend in the up-down direction. A long hole-like leg insertion hole 412 that extends and a direction that is arranged on the inner side in the left-right direction with respect to the leg insertion hole 412 of the base member 411 and that is perforated in the front-rear direction and that is inclined upward toward the left-right central axis of the base member 411 A long hole-shaped guide hole 413 extending to the front and a columnar member extending from the upper end of the base member 411 to the front side, and one end of the wiring guide arm 480 is pivotally supported. A pair of arm shaft support portions 414, a holding portion 415 extending upward from the center in the left-right direction of the base member 411 and having a tip formed in a bowl shape, and a swinging member 430 provided as a pair at the lower end portion of the base member 411. The shaft support hole 431a A supporting shaft portion 416, a photosensor 417 that is disposed in front of the base member 411 and detects the sensor passage portion 435d of the swinging member 430, a decorative plate portion 418 formed in a substantially semicircular shape in front view, Is mainly provided.

  The base member 411 has a shape in which a central portion in the left-right direction is suspended downward from both left and right end portions. Thereby, a space can be formed above the central portion in the left-right direction, and the wiring guide arm 480 can be disposed in the space (see FIG. 29).

  The leg insertion hole 412 is formed in a long hole shape, and the leg member 440 is prevented from rotating with respect to the base member 411 by inserting the connection fixing portion 442 (see FIG. 21) of the leg member 440. The Thereby, the attitude | position of the leg member 440 and the main-body member 410 can be stabilized.

  The guide hole 413 is a long hole through which the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is inserted and slid, and has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion shaft portion 421c. On the upper side of the guide hole 413, a front lid 413a that covers the front side of the leg insertion hole 412 and has a side surface facing the guide hole 413 along the upper side of the guide hole 413 is disposed. On the side, a support plate 413b that is a plate-like portion protruding from the front side of the base member 411 and is inclined upward along the guide hole 413 is disposed.

  The support plate 413b is in contact with the back surface of the swing base member 421 at the front end. Thus, the swinging base member 421 is prevented from swinging back and forth by the support plate 413b, so that the posture during movement of the shielding member 420 can be stabilized.

  The arm shaft support portion 414 is disposed on the left side as viewed from the front of the center portion of the base member 411. More specifically, the arm shaft support portion 414 is disposed at an intermediate portion between the portion where the upper end portion of the base member 411 begins to hang down and the central portion in the left-right direction. Is done. Note that the arm shaft support portion 414 supports the end portion (lower end portion) of the third guide arm 483 (see FIG. 21) of the wiring guide arm 480, and a collar member is provided at the tip of the arm shaft support portion 414. Fastened and fixed.

  The holding portion 415 is a portion that is hooked by a slide lever 473 (see FIG. 21) disposed on the rear upper plate 470. That is, in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 29), the upper end portion of the slide lever 473 and the lower end portion of the holding portion 415 formed in a bowl shape are brought into contact with each other, The downward movement of the main body member 410 is restricted. An inclined surface 415a is formed on the upper surface of the tip portion formed in a bowl shape. The inclined surface 415a does not hinder the movement of the main body member 410 even when the main body member 410 is moved to the retracted position with the slide lever 473 protruding.

  The decorative plate portion 418 is a decorative portion that is viewed in front view together with the shielding member 420 when the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position, and in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 29), and is a portion that comes into contact with the lower surface of the contact plate 421d.

  The shielding member 420 includes a swing base member 421 formed in such a manner that ends of a pair of plate-like members are pivotally supported, and a decorative member whose upper end is fastened and fixed to the front side of the swing base member 421. 422, a pair of connecting members 423 whose one end is pivotally supported coaxially with the pivot position of the swing base member 421, and a guide whose other end is pivotally supported. A guide plate 424 that mainly has a hole 424b and is fastened and fixed to the upper end on the front side of the rear case 210 is mainly provided.

  The swing base member 421 is formed of a pair of plate-like members 421a formed in a substantially arc shape, and is a swing shaft that is supported coaxially with a shaft support hole 423d formed in one end of the connecting member 423. It mainly includes a hole 421b, a pair of left and right insertion shaft portions 421c that are inserted and guided through the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410, and a contact plate 421d that protrudes on the back surface side and contacts the upper surface of the main body member 410. .

  The swing shaft hole 421b is a portion that is supported by being suspended by the connecting member 423 through a shaft support rod 423c that is inserted into one end of the connecting member 423, and that serves as the swing shaft of the pair of plate-like members 421a. It is.

  Since the insertion shaft portion 421c is inserted into the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410, the left and right end portions of the shielding member 420 are moved downward from the intermediate position (see FIG. 30). Moves toward the center in the left-right direction.

  The contact plate 421d is a curved surface protruding from the plate-like member 421a on the back side, and is formed along the shape of the upper surface of the decorative plate portion 418. Thereby, the upper surface of the main body member 410 and the lower surface of the contact plate 421d are brought into contact with each other at the retracted position.

  The decorative member 422 has a pair of width-thickness portions 422a disposed on the front side of the swing base member 421, and a portion formed below the swing base member 421 in a front view, with a lower end portion. And a hanging portion 422b that is curved backward from the swing base member 421.

  The hanging part 422b is disposed closer to the main body member 410 than the swing base member 421.

  The connecting member 423 is formed of a pair of bar members 423a bent in a frontal shape at the bent portion 423b, and includes a shaft support bar 423c. One end of the bar member 423a has a shaft support bar 423c. A shaft support hole 423d through which the guide member 422 is inserted is formed, and a slide shaft portion 423e that is inserted and guided through the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 is formed at the other end of the bar member 423a.

  The bent portion 423b is bent above a straight line connecting the shaft support hole 423d and the slide shaft portion 423e. That is, the bent portion 423b is arranged farther from the swing base member 421 than the straight line connecting the shaft support hole 423d and the slide shaft portion 423e. Therefore, a large space between the swing base member 421 and the connecting member 423 can be secured, and the design freedom of the swing base member 421 can be improved.

  The slide shaft portion 423e is formed of a cylindrical portion inserted through the guide hole 424b and a disk-shaped collar member fastened and fixed to the tip of the cylindrical portion.

  The guide plate 424 includes a base plate 424a that is fastened and fixed to the back case 210, and guide holes 424b that are a pair of elongated holes that are formed in the left and right ends of the base plate 424a in the front-rear direction and extend in the left-right direction. Is mainly provided. A pair of guide holes 424b are formed at the same height.

  The guide hole 424b is formed in the left-right direction, that is, the direction along the upper outer edge of the opening 211a of the back case 210. Therefore, the width necessary for the guide plate 424 to guide the connecting member 423 can be suppressed. In this case, since the guide plate 424 can be arranged at a position further away from the third symbol display device 81, the shielding member 420 can be formed in a larger size accordingly.

  The swinging member 430 is a member that is pivotally supported by the pivotal support portion 416, and is a base member 431 that swings and a base that protrudes from the front side of the central portion of the base member 411. A member 432, a drive motor 433 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 432 and generates a drive force that drives the main body member 431, a drive gear 434 that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 433, and the drive gear 434 are engaged with each other. A transmission gear 435 that is pivotally supported above the base member 432 with respect to the drive gear 434, and a connection member 436 that connects the connection shaft 435c of the transmission gear 435 and the connection shaft 431b of the body member 431. Prepare for.

  The main body member 431 is a member in which a hemispherical decorative part is formed on the front side, and is provided with a shaft support hole 431a that is drilled in the left-right direction below the both ends of the rear side left and right direction and through which the shaft support part 416 is inserted. And a connecting shaft 431b that is disposed at the center on the side and on which one end of the connecting member 436 is pivotally supported.

  The connecting shaft 431b is disposed on the back side of the main body member 431 at a position closer to the shaft support hole 431a than the end portion on the opposite side (upper side) of the shaft support hole 431a. Thereby, the movement width of the upper end portion of the main body member 431 can be made larger than the movement width in which the connecting member 436 is actually moved back and forth.

  The transmission gear 435 is supported by the base member 432 and extends on the opposite side of the gear formed on the main body 435a. The main body 435a is formed with a gear engaged with the drive gear 434 over a substantially half circumference. Formed along the side surface of the overhanging portion 435b, the columnar connecting shaft 435c projecting rightward from the overhanging front end portion of the overhanging portion 435b, and the front left side of the overhanging portion 435b. And a sensor passage portion 435d (see FIG. 34) that is formed in a sector shape when viewed in the left-right direction and whose peripheral portion passes through the photosensor 417.

  The connecting member 436 is a rod-like member having holes parallel to each other at both ends, and is provided with a one-side connecting hole 436a that is provided at one end and is pivotally supported by the connecting shaft 431b of the main body member 431. , And the other side connection hole 436b that is provided at the other end and is pivotally supported by the connection shaft 435c of the transmission gear 435.

  Returning to FIG. 21 and FIG. The arm member 440 has a long plate-like main body portion 441 with a pair extending in the vertical direction, and a long hole shape in which the cross section protruding from the upper end of the main body portion 441 to the front side is long in the vertical direction. A connecting and fixing portion 442, a pair of insertion shaft portions 443 projecting from the upper and lower end portions of the main body portion 441 to the back side and inserted into the guide holes 452 of the guide member 450, and the front side from the lower end portion of the main body portion 441. And the other end of the biasing spring 445 whose one end is locked to the locking portion 444 and the rear case 210. And a holding and fixing portion 446 that is fastened and fixed to the front side.

  The main body 441 has a rack gear 441 a formed on the side surface facing the main body member 410, and the rack gear 441 a meshes with the drive gear 463 of the drive device 460, thereby driving generated by the drive device 460. Force is transmitted to the leg member 440.

  The insertion shaft portion 443 is formed in a vertically long slot shape and is inserted into the guide hole 452 of the guide member 450 extending vertically, so that the posture of the leg member 440 with respect to the guide member 450 is stabilized. Can do. Furthermore, since the insertion shaft portion 443 is formed as a pair of upper and lower portions, the posture of the leg member 440 with respect to the guide member 450 can be stabilized.

  The biasing spring 445 generates a biasing force that moves the leg member 440 toward the retracted position (see FIG. 19). At this time, the other end of the urging spring 445 functions as a fixed side end that is locked to the holding and fixing portion 446, and one end functions as a moving side end that is locked to the locking portion 444.

  The guide member 450 is a main body member 451 that is a vertically long plate member arranged in a pair of left and right, and a long hole shape that is formed in the main body member 451 in a pair of upper and lower directions in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction. Guide holes 452, a pair of fixing portions 453 that fix the driving device 460 at the center in the vertical direction of the main body member 451, and the leg members 440 are retracted from the front side of the upper end portion of the main body member 451 ( And a cover member 454 disposed on the front side of the leg member 440 in the state of being disposed in FIG.

  The driving device 460 has a shape in which the side close to the main body member 410 is lowered one step backward, the side close to the main body member 410 is fixed to the fixing portion 453 of the guide member 450, and the opposite side is the fastening portion 212b ( A fixing plate 461 fixed to the fixing plate 461, a driving motor 462 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 461, and a driving gear 463 pivotally supported by the driving motor 462 are mainly provided.

  Since the fixing plate 461 has a shape in which the side away from the main body member 410 is raised to the front side, a gap surrounded by the back case 210 and the fixing plate 461 can be formed on the side away from the main body member 410. it can. Here, when the urging springs 445 are arranged on the left and right of the leg member 440, the arrangement width of the leg members 440 including the urging spring 4454 in the left-right direction is increased, thereby reducing the left-right width of the opening 211a. It was. In this embodiment, the urging spring 445 can be disposed in a gap (formed on the front side of the leg member 440) surrounded by the back case 210 and the fixing plate 461, and accordingly, the left and right sides of the leg member 440 are arranged accordingly. Space in the direction can be suppressed.

  The rear upper plate 470 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) formed above the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and includes a plate-like main body portion 471 and the main body portion 471. A cylindrical shaft support portion 472 that protrudes from the upper left end portion of the front view to the front side, a slide lever 473 that is long in the left-right direction disposed at the center of the main body portion 471, and the slide lever 473 is in the left-right direction. And a front cover 475 that is fastened and fixed to the main body 471 so as to cover the front side of the slide lever 473.

  The shaft support portion 472 is a portion on which the one side cylindrical portion 481b (see FIG. 25) of the wiring guide arm 480 is pivotally supported, and the collar member C is fastened and fixed to the tip. Wiring introduced into the main body member 410 is disposed through the vicinity of the shaft support portion 472.

  The slide lever 473 is a member that is brought into contact with the lower surface of the holding portion 415 of the main body member 410 and prevents the main body member 410 from moving downward when the main body member 410 is in the retracted position (see FIG. 29). is there. An inclined surface 473a is formed on the lower surface of the tip of the slide lever 473. Since the inclined surface 473a and the inclined surface 415a of the main body member 410 are in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the resistance that is generated on the contact surface.

  The slide lever 473 has a protruding margin that varies depending on whether electricity is conducted to the solenoid 474. For example, when the slide lever 473 protrudes to the left as viewed from the front when electricity is conducted, the slide lever 473 comes into contact with the lower surface of the holding portion 415 and the body member 410 is in a state where electricity is conducted. Is prevented from moving downward (see FIG. 29). On the other hand, if the electricity is not conducted, the slide lever 473 and the holding portion 415 are not in contact with each other, and the main body member 410 is allowed to move downward.

  Here, it is conceivable that the solenoid 474 is driven and the slide lever 473 is brought into contact with the holding portion 415 as the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. However, in this case, the driving force from the driving device 460 cannot be released until the solenoid 474 moves the slide lever 473 after the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. Therefore, when detecting the arrangement of the main body member 410 and changing the operation of the driving device 460, it is necessary to control the driving device 460 in consideration of the time for which the solenoid 474 moves the slide lever 473, and the control is difficult. It becomes.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 415a of the holding portion 415 is disposed opposite to the inclined surface 473a of the slide lever 473 by moving the main body member 410 upward with the slide lever 473 protruding (FIG. 31). (See FIG.) And the slide lever 473 is pushed back. When the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position and the contact between the holding portion 415 and the slide lever 473 in the longitudinal direction of the slide lever 473 is released, the slide lever 473 protrudes again and the lower surface of the holding portion 415 and the slide lever The upper surface of 473 is brought into contact (see FIG. 29). Thereby, regardless of the arrangement of the main body member 410, by keeping the slide lever in an extended state, it is possible to prevent the main body member 410 from moving downward after being moved to the retracted position. Therefore, it becomes easy to control the driving device 460.

  The front cover 475 is a member in which a slide groove 475a that is a recessed groove for guiding the slide lever 473 on the back surface is formed along the left-right direction. The slide groove 475a of the front cover 475 causes the slide lever 473 to slide. It is possible to suppress the displacement in the vertical direction during movement.

  The wiring guide arm 480 is a movable mechanism portion that is formed of a resin material and guides the wiring W from the rear upper plate 470 that is fastened and fixed to the back case 210 to the main body member 410. A first guide arm 481 in which the formed one-side cylindrical portion 481b is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 472, and a second guide arm 482 in which the other end portion of the first guide arm 481 is pivotally supported by one end portion. And a third guide arm 483 that pivotally supports the other end portion of the second guide arm 482 at one end portion and is pivotally supported by the arm shaft support portion 414.

  Here, the wiring W is an electric wiring (for example, a flat harness) formed in a strip shape (formed wide in the vertical direction in FIG. 27). The second guide arm 482 has a length in the longitudinal direction shorter than the diameter of the collar member C than the first guide arm 481, and the third guide arm 483 has a length in the longitudinal direction rather than the second guide arm 482. Is shorter than the diameter of the collar member C.

  The wiring guide arm 480 is configured to accommodate the wiring W therein, and is a member that prevents the wiring W from being broken and disconnected. Thereby, it is not necessary to arrange | position the wiring W introduced into the main body member 410 through the leg member 440, and the space which arrange | positions the leg member 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, the opening 211a can be enlarged in the left-right direction.

  Next, the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the third guide arm 483 is configured to include those described in the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 as the technical idea, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  25 (a) is a front view of the first guide arm 481, FIG. 25 (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm 481, and FIG. 25 (c) is an XXVc of FIG. 25 (a). FIG. 25D is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm 481 taken along the line -XXVc, and FIG. 25D is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm 481 taken along the line XXVd-XXVd of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (d), the first guide arm 481 includes a plate-like arm portion 481a formed in a long plate shape, and the left end of the plate-like arm portion 481a when viewed from the front. A cylindrical portion 481b having a shaft arranged on the vertical line of the lower bottom surface (the side surface on the lower side in FIG. 25A) of the plate-like arm portion 481a and extending in the front-rear direction, and the plate-like arm portion The other side tubular portion extending in the front-rear direction and having an axis disposed on the vertical line of the lower bottom surface of the plate-like arm portion 481a at the end opposite to the one-side tubular portion 481b in the end portion of 481a. 481c, an attachment portion 481d formed in a plate shape at a predetermined interval above the plate-like arm portion 481a, a bottom portion 481e that connects the back side of the plate-like arm portion 481a and the attachment portion 481d, and an attachment portion 481d Front locking portion 481 extending from the front side surface toward the plate-like arm portion 481a. And, mainly includes the.

  The wiring W is inserted through the inside of the concave cross section formed by the plate-like arm portion 481a, the appendage portion 481d, and the bottom portion 481e (see FIG. 27). Thereby, it can suppress that the wiring W is rubbed with another member, or is pinched | interposed into another member.

  In the plate-like arm portion 481a, a notch portion 481a1 is formed at a portion opposed to the front locking portion 481f, and the plate-like arm portion 481a is thinned at a portion where the notch portion 481a1 is formed. .

  The cutout portion 481a1 is a recess formed in the plate-like arm portion 481a in a slightly larger shape than the front locking portion 481f when viewed from the front, and is formed across the width direction of the plate-like arm portion 481a. Note that in the portion where the notch 481a1 is formed, the formation of the bottom 481e is omitted (the bottom 481e is formed through).

  By configuring the cutout portion 481a1 as described above, the first guide arm 481 can be easily manufactured by mold molding (by one-way mold cutting). In addition, the wiring W can be easily accommodated in the first guide arm 481 by inserting the wiring W from the notch 481a1.

  Of the plate-like arm portion 481a, the portion other than the portion where the notch portion 481a1 is formed has a shorter interval with the attachment portion 481d than the overhanging width of the front locking portion 481f. Therefore, in a state where the wiring W is accommodated in the first guide arm 481 and extended in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 27A), the wiring W is dropped off to the front side (FIG. 27A front side). Can be prevented.

  The plate-like arm portion 481a includes a rib portion N formed in a rib shape across the width direction on the side surface facing the attachment portion 481d. The rib portion N is formed in the vicinity of the other cylindrical portion 481c that is pivotally supported by the second guide arm 482, and is a rib that protrudes from the second guide arm 482 in the middle portion of the plate-like arm portion 481a. It is formed alternately with portions N.

  The other cylindrical portion 481c includes an enlarged diameter portion 481c1 whose inner diameter is partially increased, and an end surface on the back side is more on the front side than the bottom portion 481e in order to form an overlap margin with the second guide arm. It is formed (see FIG. 25B).

  The enlarged diameter portion 481c1 is formed over the inner circumference side of the other cylindrical portion 481c over a half circumference (the upper half circumference in FIG. 25A), and the other side from the other bottom portion 481e2 side of the other side cylindrical portion 481c. It is a depression formed up to approximately half the length of the cylinder of the side cylindrical portion 481c (see FIG. 25C).

  The attachment portion 481d includes an arcuate attachment portion 481d1 formed as an arc concentric with the other side tubular portion 481c around the other side tubular portion 481c, and extends to the front side from the plate-like arm portion 481a. . Thereby, even if it is a case where the plane latching | locking part 481f is formed, the clearance gap which penetrates wiring from the front side is securable.

  The attachment portion 481d includes a rib portion N formed in a rib shape across the width direction on the side surface facing the plate-like arm portion 481a. The rib portion N is formed at an intermediate position between the rib portions N projecting from the plate-like arm portion 481a in the intermediate portion of the attachment portion 481d.

  The arcuate appendage 481d1 is formed with a radius larger than the radius of the substantially arcuate shape formed when the wiring W bends to the outside of the other cylindrical portion 481c (upper right in FIG. 27 (b)). The

  In addition, since the wiring guide arm 480 is formed on the inner upper end of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), when replacing or maintaining the wiring W, the wiring is attached along a route that is not blocked by the rear case 210. It is necessary to remove. In the present embodiment, the appendage portion 481d that is close to the upper wall surface of the back case 210 is formed so as to protrude forward from the plate-like arm portion 481a that is separated from the upper wall surface of the back case 210. Therefore, for example, when removing the wiring W, it is only necessary to pull the wiring W to the front side and pull it out in the direction from the attachment portion 481d to the plate-like arm portion 481a. Never become. When wiring is inserted, it may be inserted in the opposite direction. Therefore, the maintainability of replacement of the wiring W can be improved.

  The bottom portion 481e is disposed above the one-side cylindrical portion 481b and is disposed above the one-side bottom portion 481e1 formed in a fan shape around the axis of the one-side tubular portion and the other-side tubular portion 481c. The other side bottom part 481e2 formed mainly in the fan shape centering on the axis | shaft spaced apart from the axis | shaft of the side cylindrical part 481c upwards is mainly provided. Note that the end of the arcuate appendage 481d1 is formed on the left side of the front view of the end of the other side bottom 481e2.

  The plane locking portion 481f is a claw-like member that prevents the wiring W from falling off from the front side. That is, the wiring W is formed with a width shorter than the length from the bottom portion 481e to the front locking portion 481f.

  26 (a) is a front view of the second guide arm 482, FIG. 26 (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm 482, and FIG. 26 (c) is an XXVIc of FIG. 26 (a). FIG. 26D is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm 482 taken along the line -XXVIc, and FIG. 26D is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm 482 taken along the line XXVId-XXVId of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d), the second guide arm 482 includes a plurality of configurations having the same technical idea as the first guide arm 481, and therefore the description of the configuration is omitted. To do. That is, the plate-like arm portion 481a is the plate-like arm portion 482a, the other-side tubular portion 481c is the other-side tubular portion 482c, the attachment portion 481d is the attachment portion 482d, the bottom portion 481e is the bottom portion 482e, and the front locking portion. 481f corresponds to the front locking portion 482f.

  The plate-like arm portion 482a includes a cutout portion 482a2 at a portion disposed opposite to the front locking portion 482f. Since the technical idea of the notch 482a2 is the same as the technical idea of the notch 481a1, description thereof will be omitted.

  The plate-like arm portion 482a and the appendage portion 482d include a rib portion N on the side surfaces facing each other. In the vicinity of the one-side shaft support portion 482b that is pivotally supported by the first guide arm 481, a rib portion N is formed in the attachment portion 482d, and in the intermediate portion of the second guide arm 482, the rib portion N is a plate-like arm portion 482a. And the appendage 482d.

  The second guide arm 482 protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the upper right part of the bottom part 482e to the front side and has a one-side shaft support part 482b in which a fastening part is formed at the tip, and the one-side shaft support part 482b as a shaft. One side bottom portion 482e1 formed in a substantially arc shape and extending on the same plane from the bottom portion 482e, and the right end portion of the plate-like arm portion 482a protruding from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the one side bottom portion 482e1 to the front side And an arcuate plate portion 482a1 connected to the main body.

  The arcuate plate portion 482a1 is formed with a radius larger than the radius of the substantially arcuate shape formed when the wiring W bends to the outside of the other cylindrical portion 481c (upper right in FIG. 27 (b)). The

  The one side shaft support portion 482b is a portion in which a reduced diameter portion 482b1 is formed and the other cylindrical portion 481c of the first guide arm 481 is inserted, and the front side surface of the one side bottom portion 482e1 is the other side cylinder. It is formed so that it can contact | abut to the back side surface of the shape part 481c. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 27), the bottom portions 481e and 482e are formed on the same plane so that the bottom portions 481e and 482e can come into contact with each other in the respective rotation directions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482. It is formed. Therefore, excessive rotation of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be prevented, and the wiring W can be prevented from being bent excessively (see FIG. 27).

  The reduced diameter portion 482b1 is formed on the outer peripheral side of the one-side shaft support portion 482b over a half circumference (the lower half circumference in FIG. 26A), and the one-side shaft from the one-side bottom portion 482e1 side of the one-side shaft support portion 482b This is a recess formed up to approximately half the length of the support portion 482b (see FIG. 26C).

  Next, swinging of the second guide arm 482 with respect to the first guide arm 481 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 27A and 27B are front views of the first guide arm 481, the second guide arm 482, and the wiring W. FIG. 27A shows a state where the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481 (corresponding to the state shown in FIG. 29), and FIG. 27B shows the state shown in FIG. A state in which the second guide arm 482 is swung counterclockwise from the state a) to the end of the movable range in which the second guide arm 482 can swing relative to the first guide arm 481 (corresponding to the state of FIG. 33). Illustrated. In FIG. 27B, the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 482 and the other side bottom portion 481e2 of the first guide arm 481 are in contact with each other, thereby preventing the second guide arm 482 from further swinging. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the wiring W has concave portions (FIGS. 25 (d) and 26 (d) formed by plate-like arm portions 481a and 482a, appendages 481d and 482d, and bottom portions 481e and 482e. ))). Therefore, the rigidity of the first guide arm 481 or the second guide arm 482 can prevent the wiring W from being bent to the extent that the body member 410 is disconnected during the movement of the main body member 410.

  In addition, at the pivotal support position (the right end in FIG. 27A) of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wiring W is disposed around the other cylindrical portion 481c. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wiring W from being bent at a radius of curvature equal to or less than the diameter of the other cylindrical portion 481c at the pivotal support positions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482. Therefore, the wiring W can be prevented from being bent, and disconnection of the wiring W can be suppressed.

  The state shown in FIG. 27A corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 29, that is, the state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. A higher speed at which the main body member 410 is moved from the retracted position to the extended position is likely to improve the effect. When the main body member 410 is started from a state where it is stopped at the retracted position, it is necessary for the driving device 460 to generate a driving force that exceeds the inertial force of the main body member 410 and the inertial force of the wiring guide arm 480. For this reason, in the state of FIG. 27A, it is desirable that the rotational resistance at the shaft support position of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 constituting the wiring guide arm 480 is small.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27A, in the state where the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the diameter-enlarged portion 481c1 and the axis of the one-side tubular portion 481b are arranged. The reduced diameter portion 482b1 surrounds. The enlarged-diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced-diameter portion 482b1 are portions that are recessed in a direction away from the mating member that forms the axial support relationship, and have an effect of suppressing rotational friction during shaft rotation. In a state where the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are formed around the axis of the one-side cylindrical portion 481b (over the entire circumference). Therefore, resistance when the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481 is suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 27B, the range in which the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are arranged around the axis of the one-side cylindrical portion 481b is substantially a half circle (FIG. 27B, upper half circumference). ). As shown in FIG. 27 (b), the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are mostly overlapped. In this case, the rotational resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be increased as compared with the state of FIG.

  From the state in which the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the extended diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 overlap each other as the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481. And the rotational resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 increases. That is, the speed of the second guide arm 482 can be decreased as the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481.

  Accordingly, the speed at which the other side bottom part 481e2 and the one side bottom part 482e1 come into contact with each other can be reduced, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are brought into contact with the other side bottom part 481e2 and the one side bottom part 482e1. The load received by contact can be suppressed. Thereby, the durability of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be improved, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are vigorously opposed to each other (the second guide arm 482 is shown in FIG. 27). It is possible to prevent bending from the state (b) to the side further rotated counterclockwise.

  In this embodiment, since the wiring guide arm 480 is formed by pivotally supporting three members, the movement speed of the wiring guide arm 480 can be made variable even when the movement speed of the main body member 410 is constant. can do.

  For example, in the state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 33), the posture of the wiring guide arm 480 is not limited to one, and the third guide arm 483 can rotate upward (posture). The changeable part is changeable. Therefore, the moving speed of the first guide arm 481 can be adjusted by the change in the posture of the third guide arm 483 even while the main body member 410 is moving. Therefore, even if the moving speed of the wiring guide arm 480 is changed during the movement of the main body member 410, it is not necessary to change the moving speed of the main body member 410 accordingly.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, a gap is formed between the arcuate attachment portion 481d1 and the arcuate plate portion 482a1 when the other side bottom portion 481e2 and the one side bottom portion 482e1 come into contact with each other. Even if the wiring W is bent to the outside of the other cylindrical portion 481c (upper right in FIG. 27B) by this gap, the wiring W is sandwiched between the arcuate attachment portion 481d1 and the arcuate plate portion 482a1. Can be prevented, and disconnection of the wiring W can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the wiring guide arm 480 is in the opened state, the wiring W moves greatly to the outside of the other cylindrical portion 481c, and in particular, the first guide arm 481 and the second guide. The wiring W is likely to be displaced in the vicinity of the end portion (axial support position) of the arm 482. If the wiring W is repeatedly displaced with respect to the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wiring W and the inner surfaces of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are rubbed, and the durability of the wiring W is reached. May be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rib portion N formed in a rib shape on the inner surface of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 is caught by the wire W, so that the wire W and the first guide arm 481 and Resistance with the second guide arm 482 can be improved, and displacement of the wiring W can be suppressed.

  In the vicinity of the pivot support position of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wiring W is effective by forming the rib portion N on the side surface opposite to the direction in which the wiring W is separated from the other cylindrical portion 481c. Can be supported. That is, for example, the portion of the wiring W that protrudes from the connecting position of the arcuate appendage 481d1 and the appendage 481d toward the appendage 481d is pressed against the plate-like arm 481a along the shape of the arcuate appendage 481d1. . Therefore, by forming the rib portion N in the pressed portion, the resistance between the wiring W and the plate-like arm portion 481a can be increased.

  It should be noted that the side surface of the portion near the pivotal support position of the plate-like arm portion 481a against which the wiring W is pressed is curved and recessed to the opposite side of the attachment portion 481d, so that the wiring W is fitted into the depression, and the wiring The positional shift between W and the plate-like arm portion 481a can be suppressed. In this case, since the surface of the curved depression and the wiring W are in contact with each other by surface contact, the local wear of the wiring W is suppressed compared to the case where the wiring W receives resistance from the rib portion N by point contact. Can do.

  Further, the interval between the plate-like arm portion 481a and the appendage portion 481d may be widened in the vicinity of the pivot support position. For example, the attachment portion 481d may be inclined in such a manner that the attachment portion 481d becomes farther from the plate-like arm portion 481a as it approaches the other side tubular portion 481c from the front locking portion 481f on the right side of FIG. In this case, the wiring W is bent by a portion where the gap between the attachment portion 481d and the plate-like arm portion 481a is widened (portion in the vicinity of the other cylindrical portion 481c). It is possible to absorb the displacement of the wiring W at the intermediate portion of the first guide arm 481 (the portion sandwiched between the front locking portions 481f) (the wiring W cancels the sag near the support portion). Therefore, it is possible to suppress displacement in the longitudinal direction of the first guide arm 481). Accordingly, the wiring W can be prevented from rubbing and wearing against the inner side surface of the first guide arm 481, and the durability of the wiring W can be improved.

  In an intermediate portion between the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the rib portions N are alternately formed on the inner side surfaces arranged to face each other. Therefore, compared to the case where the rib portion N is formed on only one of the opposing inner side surfaces, the wiring W can be easily hooked on more rib portions N. Thereby, resistance between the wiring W and the 1st guide arm 481 and the 2nd guide arm 482 can be raised, and position shift with the wiring W and the 1st guide arm 481 and the 2nd guide arm 482 is suppressed. can do.

  In FIG. 27, a disk-shaped collar member C fastened and fixed to the front side of the wiring guide arm 480 is illustrated by an imaginary line. For example, the collar member C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the one-side shaft support portion 482b or the tip of the shaft support portion 472 (see FIG. 21) inserted through the one-side tubular portion 481b, and the front surface of each cylindrical portion 481b, 481c. It is a member which prevents the movement to the side.

  In the present embodiment, the collar member C extends to a position where at least a portion thereof overlaps the adjacent appendages 481d and 482d in the front view or does not overlap in the front view, and the collar member C and the appendages 481d, The wiring W extends from the position 482d to a position where the wiring W does not fall out. For example, at the left end of FIG. 27B, there is a gap between the collar member C and the appendage portion 481d, but the wiring W is deformed so as to be separated from the one-side tubular portion 481b (swell outward). Therefore, the possibility of the wiring W dropping out from the gap is small. That is, the collar member C is extended until it overlaps the wiring W when viewed from the front (FIG. 27), thereby having a diameter sufficient to prevent the wiring W from dropping off. As a result, the wiring W is prevented from falling off the wiring guide arm 480.

  Here, assuming that the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are formed with the same length, the collar member C is brought into contact with the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 when folded. Can no longer be folded. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the lengths of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction are different. That is, in a state where the extending directions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are parallel to each other (see FIG. 27A), the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are arranged on the front side of the one-side tubular portion 481b. The color member C is different from the collar member C provided on the front side of the other cylindrical portion 482c so as not to interfere with each other.

  As a result, the arrangement space can be suppressed by folding the wiring guide arm 480 while suppressing the wiring W from falling off the wiring guide arm 480 by disposing the collar member C. It is desirable that the lengths of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction (the length to the axis of the collar member C) be different from the diameter of the collar member C.

  Next, the operation of the composite operation unit 400 will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33, a change in the posture of the shielding member 420 with respect to the sliding movement of the main body member 410 will be described.

  28 is a front view of the composite operation unit 400, FIG. 29 is a rear view of the composite operation unit 400, FIG. 30 is a front view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. FIG. 32 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 33 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 400.

  28 and 29 show a state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. In FIGS. 30 and 31, the posture of the swing base member 421 with respect to the main body member 410 from the state in FIGS. FIG. 32 and FIG. 33 show a state in which the body member 410 is disposed at an intermediate position where the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is disposed at the inner end of the guide hole 424b. A state in which the member 410 is disposed at the overhang position is illustrated.

  In FIG. 28, the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIGS. 28, 30 and 32, a part of the main body member 410 is illustrated by a hidden line and the overlapping portion P is an imaginary line. 29, 31 and 33, the rear upper plate 470 is shown in phantom lines.

  Further, in FIG. 30, the vicinity of the connecting member 423 is enlarged, and the state in which the connecting member 423 is moved by a predetermined amount from the center side ends of the pair of guide holes 424 b in the enlarged view is illustrated by an imaginary line. Is done. In FIG. 31, the vicinity of the guide hole 413 is enlarged, and a state in which the insertion shaft portion 421 c is moved from the lower end of the guide hole 413 by a predetermined amount in the enlarged view is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  The main body member 410 is moved in the vertical direction along the guide hole 452 as the leg member 440 engaged with the drive gear 463 is moved as the drive gear 463 is rotated.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the contact plate 421d of the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is supported by the decorative plate portion 418 of the base member 411 in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. Thus, the central portion of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction is supported. In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is disposed at the left and right end portions of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. The wiring guide arms 480 are folded in a posture in which the extending directions of the respective guide arms are parallel to each other. Further, the upper surface of the slide lever 473 and the lower surface of the holding portion 415 are brought into contact with each other, so that the main body member 410 is prevented from moving downward.

  As shown in FIG. 28, at least a part of the mechanism portion such as the transmission gear 435 of the swinging member 430 is a gap formed between the pair of decorative members 422 of the shielding member 420 (formed at the center in the left-right direction and downward). It is arranged in a gap that becomes wider as it goes (see FIGS. 28 and 34). Thereby, in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position, the swinging member 430 can be disposed in the vertical direction on the shielding member 420 and the vertical width of the shielding member 420 and the swinging member 430 can be increased. Can be suppressed. In this case, since the area of the front view formed by the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swinging member 430 can be reduced, the opening 211a (see FIG. 6) can be further enlarged.

  Here, for example, a mechanism portion such as the transmission gear 435 of the swinging member 430 may be disposed on the front side of the main body member 410. In this case, in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion P between the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422 (to bring the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422 close to each other in the moving direction of the main body member 410), the decorative member 422 is moved to its mechanical portion. It can be considered to be arranged on the front side. On the other hand, in this case, it is necessary to move the swinging member 430 that accommodates the decorative member 422 to the front side (direction away from the main body member 410), so that the space on the front side of the swinging member 430 is suppressed, and the neck It becomes difficult to form the swing member 430 three-dimensionally on the front side.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, at least a part of the swinging member 430 (a mechanism portion such as the transmission gear 435) can be accommodated in a space that is generated when the pair of decorative members 422 are separated from each other. it can. Accordingly, for example, it is not necessary to move the decoration member 422 to the front side of the mechanism portion of the swing member 430 in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion P of the main body member 410 and the decoration member 422. 430 may be disposed proximate to the body member 410. Thereby, the swinging member 430 can be three-dimensionally formed on the front side.

  In FIG. 28, since the swinging member 430 takes a posture in which the main body member 431 tilts (see FIG. 34), the vertical width in the front view is suppressed as compared with the standing posture (see FIGS. 32 and 35). The Therefore, even when viewed as a single swing member 430, the area of the front view formed by the swing member 430 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the contact plate 421 d of the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is supported by the decorative plate portion 418 of the base member 411 in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position. Thus, the central portion in the left-right direction of the swing base member 421 is supported (that is, the shielding member 420 has the same posture as that of FIGS. 28 and 29). In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is disposed at the inner side end portion of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. Placed in. Further, the wiring guide arm 480 has the third guide arm 483 mounted on the upper side surface of the main body member 410, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are inclined with respect to the left-right direction.

  Since the third guide arm 483 is formed shorter than the other guide arms 481 and 482, the state in which the third guide arm 483 is stably placed on the upper side surface of the main body member 410 is changed to the main body member. It can be maintained longer during 410 movement. Thereby, the wiring W arrange | positioned inside the wiring guide arm 480 can be stabilized more, and the disconnection of the wiring W can be prevented.

  Here, when the main body member 410 is moved downward at a high speed and disposed at an intermediate position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 rebounds at the inner end portion of the guide hole 424b, and the swing base of the shielding member 420 is moved. There is a possibility that the shaft support position (the shaft support rod 423c, see FIG. 23) between the member 421 and the connecting member 423 jumps upward, and the posture of the shielding member 420 is not stable. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the guide hole 413 for guiding the insertion shaft portion 421c of the swing base member 421 is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the inner side in the left-right direction, and the guide for guiding the slide shaft portion 423e is guided. A hole 424b is formed in the left-right direction.

  In other words, when the slide shaft portion 423e reaches the inner end of the guide hole 424b, the direction component perpendicular to the direction in which the insertion shaft portion 421c rebounds the pivot position between the swing base member 421 and the connecting member 423. It is guided to be movable in the direction having

  Therefore, a resistance F directed downward from the upper side surface of the guide hole 413 is applied to the insertion shaft portion 421c that is moved upward in accordance with the upward movement of the swing base member 421, and the upper portion of the insertion shaft portion 421c. The movement to is suppressed. In this case, the swinging base member 421 is restrained from bouncing upward and the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 from bouncing back at the inner end of the guide hole 424b. In addition, even if the swing base member 421 jumps upward and the connecting member 423 jumps upward, the slide shaft portion 423e is brought into contact with the upper and lower side surfaces of the guide hole 424b, thereby suppressing the movement of the connecting member. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, the bent portion 423b is formed in the connecting member 423, and even if the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces off at the inner end portion of the guide hole 424b, the bent portion 423b does not move from the swing base member 421. It moves in the direction away from the upper surface (the bent portion 213b moves to the center in the left-right direction by the distance X). Therefore, when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 rebounds at the inner end in the left-right direction of the guide hole 424b, a sufficient interval can be formed between the connecting member 423 and the swing base member 421. The collision with the swing base member 421 can be prevented. Thereby, the design freedom degree of the rocking | swiveling base member 421 can be improved.

  In the state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position, the connecting member 423 connected to the swing base member 421 suppresses the movement of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction. That is, for example, when the swing base member 421 starts to move to the left in the front view due to disturbance, the connecting member 423 inserted through the guide hole 424b on the right side in the front view is located at the center in the left-right direction of the pair of guide holes 424b. The movement is stopped at the end, and the movement of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction is suppressed. Therefore, the arrangement of the swing base member 421 can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is suspended and supported by the connecting member 423 in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position. In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is disposed at the inner side end of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the upper end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. Placed in. Further, the wiring guide arm 480 has a posture in which the other side bottom portion 481e2 (see FIG. 25) of the first guide arm 481 and the one side bottom portion 482e1 (see FIG. 26) of the second guide arm 482 are in contact with each other in the swinging direction. Take.

  Here, when the main body member 410 moves from the intermediate position to the extended position, the pair of left and right insertion shaft portions 421c move upward and downward in the left-right direction along the guide hole 413 as the movement proceeds. That is, the forces applied to the pair of swing base members 421 from the pair of left and right guide holes 413 of the main body member 410 are directed in opposite directions, and cancel each other. Therefore, the swing shaft hole 421b (see FIG. 33) formed on the central axis of the pair of swing base members 421 is restrained from being displaced in the left-right direction, so that the shielding member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction. Is suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position, the pair of swing base members 421 and the pair of decoration members 422 of the shielding member 420 are brought into contact with each other. Thereby, for example, even if one swinging base member 421 moves faster than the other swinging base member 421 and the pair of swinging base members 421 are displaced from each other (vertical shift), The displacement can be suppressed by contact with the swing base member 421. Thereby, the attitude | position in the projecting position of the shielding member 420 can be stabilized.

  A change in the area of the overlapping portion P will be described. The overlapping portion P means a portion where the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 overlap in front view. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 30, most of the body member 410 corresponds to the overlapping portion P from the state where the body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position to the state where the body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32, in the state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position, the shielding member 420 is moved above the main body member 410, particularly in the center in the left-right direction, and the area of the overlapping portion P is increased. Is reduced. That is, the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 are visible separately.

  Thereby, the area in the front view of the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 is larger when the main body member 410 is disposed at the extended position than when the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. In particular, the width in the vertical direction at the center in the left-right direction is enlarged. In this case, the area change in the front view of the area formed by the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 can be increased at the center of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) that is likely to attract the player's attention. The effect can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described change in the area of the overlapping portion P occurs after the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 start to protrude to the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). Thereby, it is possible to produce an effect as if the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 expand, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35, the operation of the swing member 430 of the combined operation unit 400 will be described. 34 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 taken along the line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. 28, and FIG. 35 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 taken along the line XXXV-XXXV in FIG. 34, the state in which the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is tilted is illustrated by a solid line, and the hanging portion 422b of the decorative member 422 is accommodated between the main body member 431 and the main body member 410 of the swinging member 430. The resulting state is illustrated. In FIG. 35, the state in which the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is raised is illustrated by a solid line, and the state in which the swinging member 430 is tilted is illustrated by an imaginary line for reference, and is disposed in an overhanging state. The moving member 540 of the rocking motion unit 500 is shown in phantom lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the drive gear 434 is rotated by the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 23), and the transmission gear 435 is rotated accordingly, so that the connecting shaft 435c moves back and forth, and the connection is made. When the connecting member 436 supported by the shaft 435c moves in the front-rear direction, the main body member 431 supported by the connecting member 436 swings around the shaft supporting portion 416 (see FIG. 23). In this case, the main body member 431 is moved in a direction approaching and separating from the decorative member 422b. Note that the swinging member 430 can switch between the tilted state shown in FIG. 34 and the standing state shown in FIG. 35 at an arbitrary position, and the posture can be changed as long as it does not interfere with the shielding member 420.

  Since the shaft support 416 (see FIG. 23) is connected to the lower end side of the swinging member 430, when the swinging member 430 is in a tilted state (see FIG. 34), the upper end side disposed to face the shielding member 420 A large distance D between the main body member 410 and the main body member 410 can be secured. On the other hand, the movement width of the lower end portion of the swinging member 430 on the opposite side of the shielding member 420 can be reduced, and the swinging member 430 is compared with the case where the swinging member 430 slides back and forth. It is possible to suppress a space necessary for disposing the slab.

  In other words, when the space for storing the shielding member 420 is secured by sliding movement in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the swinging member 430 on the opposite side of the shielding member 420 is also moved by the distance D in the same manner as the upper end portion. Therefore, the arrangement space for the swinging member 430 increases. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the swinging member 430 is swung, so that the shielding member 420 can be smoothly accommodated between the main body member 410 and the swinging member 430, and the arrangement region of the swinging member 430 can be increased. It is possible to achieve both suppression.

  In the present embodiment, in particular, the change width d of the outer shape of the lower portion on the front side of the main body member 431 is small while the swinging member 430 is tilted. Therefore, even if the main body member 431 is tilted in a state where another member approaches or abuts below the main body member 431 (see FIG. 9), it is possible to suppress the load between the members.

  In the present embodiment, in the state of FIG. 9, the upper surface of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 40) arranged to face the main body member 431 forms a downwardly convex curved surface, and the main body member 431 is close to this curved surface. The main body member 431 can be tilted at a position (a position where the main body member 431 and the moving member 540 partially overlap in a front view). This makes it possible to change the posture of the main body member 431 with a large width at the upper portion of the main body member 431 while ensuring the effect of allowing the main body member 431 and the moving member 540 to approach each other at the lower portion of the main body member 431 so as to be integrally viewed. it can.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the decorative member 422 of the shielding member 420 is inclined toward the back surface (the main body member 410 side) as it goes downward (closer to the shaft support portion 416 (see FIG. 23)). And curved in a direction away from the swinging member 430. In this case, the distance between the decorative member 422 and the swinging member 430 when the decorative member 422 starts to be accommodated between the swinging member 430 and the main body member 410 can be secured. Collision with the swing member 430 can be avoided.

  Further, the lower end portion of the decorative member 422 can be accommodated deeply (downward) in the gap formed between the main body member 410 and the swinging member 430 while the upper end portion of the decorative member 422 is projected to the front. . Since no other members are arranged on the front side of the swinging member 430, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the front portion of the swinging member 430 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the state where the swinging member 430 is raised, the decoration member 422 is separated upward from between the swinging member 430 and the main body member 410, and the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is separated. The upper end portion and the main body member 410 are disposed close to each other. Thereby, the dead space when the decorative member 422 is not accommodated between the main body member 410 and the swinging member 430 can be filled. In addition, by allowing the body member 431 of the swinging member 430 to be disposed close to the body member 410, it is possible to increase the movement width of the swinging member 430 in the front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 10 in which the front-rear width is defined. This can ensure the effect of the swinging motion of the swinging member 430.

  Here, in FIG. 34, the swinging member 430 is disposed above the third symbol display device 81, and the swinging member 430 is tilted. In this case, the direction A1 of the production surface on the front side of the swinging member 430 is inclined obliquely downward toward the front. In contrast, in FIG. 35, the swinging member 430 is disposed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and the state in which the swinging member 430 is raised is illustrated by a solid line. In this case, the direction A2 of the production surface on the front side of the swing member 430 is directed to the front. That is, by adjusting the swinging degree of the swinging member 430, the direction A1 and A2 on the front side of the swinging member 430 is directed toward the player's eyes (the front side in the center of the third symbol display device 81). Can be adjusted. Therefore, the attention of the swinging member 430 can be improved, and the production effect can be improved.

  Further, in order to improve the attention of the swinging member 430, a new rotation shaft is not provided, but the shaft support 416 (see FIG. 23) is used. That is, the shaft support portion 416 has a purpose of securing a distance between the decorative member 422 and the swinging member 430 when the decorative member 422 starts to be accommodated between the swinging member 430 and the main body member 410, and It is also used for the purpose of adjusting the orientations A1 and A2 on the front side of the member 430 to the direction toward the player's eyes (the front side in the center of the third symbol display device 81).

  The degree of swinging of the swinging member 430 can be determined by whether or not the sensor passage portion 435d passes through the photosensor 417. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 34, the sensor passage portion 435d does not pass through the photosensor 417. On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 35, the sensor passage portion 435 passes through the photosensor 417. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a gap between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410 is ensured in a state where the sensor passage portion 435 does not pass through the photosensor 417.

  Therefore, by moving the main body member 410 upward in a state where the sensor passage portion 435 does not pass through the photosensor 417, the shielding member 420 and the main body member 410 can be moved without causing the swinging member 430 and the shielding member 420 to interfere with each other. It can be accommodated between the swinging member 430 and the swinging member 430.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, it will be described that the malfunction of the combined operation unit 400 is suppressed by the shape of the hanging portion 422b. 36 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 taken along the line XXXVII-XXXVII in FIG. 36 and 37 show a state where the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is tilted by a predetermined angle from the standing state (see FIG. 35) and the back side of the main body member 431 is in contact with the hanging portion 422b. .

  As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the main body member 410 is moved up and down while the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is in an intermediate position between a standing state (see FIG. 35) and a tilted state (see FIG. 34). Control may be performed. This control is performed, for example, when the combined operation unit 400 is immediately changed from the state of FIG. 34 to the state of FIG.

  Here, after confirming that the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is tilted (see the broken line in FIG. 35) from the standing state shown in FIG. 35, the drive motor 462 that drives the main body member 410 (see FIG. 21). , The state where the back side of the main body member 431 contacts the hanging part 422b cannot occur (see FIG. 34).

  However, in this case, the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 21) is rotated after the completion of the operation of the swing member 430. Therefore, compared to the case where the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 23) for tilting the swinging member 430 and the drive motor 462 for driving the main body member 410 are simultaneously rotated, the combined operation unit 400 is changed from the state of FIG. The period to change to the state becomes longer. In other words, in order to immediately change the combined operation unit 400 from the state of FIG. 34 to the state of FIG. 35, it is necessary to drive the drive motor 433 and the drive motor 462 simultaneously. In this case, the main body member 410 is moved up and down in the middle of the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 from the standing state (see FIG. 35) to the tilted state (see FIG. 34). In this case, the main body portion 431 of the swinging member 430 may come into contact with the hanging portion 422b, and the combined operation unit 400 may malfunction.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the hanging part 422b is curved and formed (see FIG. 37). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37, the contact of the swing member 430 with the back surface side (formed by a flat surface) of the main body member 431 is not contact with a surface but contact with a point (line). It is possible to suppress frictional resistance at the contact position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the combined operation unit 400 due to the contact between the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 and the hanging portion 422b.

  For example, when the state of FIGS. 36 and 37 is a state in which the main body member 410 is moving upward from FIG. 35, the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 and the hanging portion 422b of the swinging member 430 is reduced. If it is large, it will be a factor of reducing the moving speed of the main body member 410. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 and the hanging portion 422b of the swinging member 430 is suppressed, the moving speed of the main body member 410 can be increased. Further, as the main body member 410 moves upward, the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 tilts with the curved shape of the hanging part 422b, so that the hanging part 422b applies a driving force to the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430. A relationship to give arises. As a result, it is possible to reduce the burden of the drive motor 433 causing the swinging member 430 to tilt.

  Further, for example, when the state of FIGS. 36 and 37 is a state in which the main body member 410 is moving downward from FIG. 34, the friction at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 and the hanging portion 422b. When resistance is large, it becomes a factor which reduces the moving speed of the main-body member 410. FIG. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 and the hanging portion 422b of the swinging member 430 is suppressed, the moving speed of the main body member 410 can be increased. In addition, since the hanging part 422b is formed so as to be inclined obliquely backward and the back surface side of the main body member 431 is formed in a flat shape, even if the main body member 410 moves downward while contacting each other, the hanging part 422b and the main body member 431 do not catch each other.

  Therefore, the combined operation unit 400 is prevented from malfunctioning by moving the main body member 410 while the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is tilted. Therefore, the state of the combined operation unit 400 can be changed immediately by moving the main body member 410 while the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 is tilted.

  Next, the swing operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 38 is a front perspective view of the swing operation unit 500, and FIG. 39 is a rear perspective view of the swing operation unit 500. 38 and 39 show a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position.

  The swing operation unit 500 is composed of a pair of left and right operation units (see FIG. 5), but since the technical configuration is common, in FIGS. 38 to 50, the left side operation of the pair of left and right operation units is performed. The unit will be described as a swing operation unit 500.

  40 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation unit 500, and FIG. 41 is a rear exploded perspective view of the swing operation unit 500. 40, the fastening hole 527 is partially enlarged, and in FIG. 41, the bridge member 528 is partially enlarged.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the swing operation unit 500 includes a rectangular plate-shaped base member 510 and shaft support holes 522 and 526 formed at both ends, and one side shaft support hole 522 formed in the base member 510. The distance between the center axes of the elongated plate-shaped drive side arm member 520 that is pivotally supported by the shaft and the shaft support holes 532 and 533 formed at both ends is the shaft support hole 522 of the drive side arm member 520. , 526 has a length equivalent to the distance between the central axes, and one side axial support hole 532 of one end is supported by the base member 510 so as to be swingable. A horizontally long block-shaped moving member 540 that is pivotably supported by the other side shaft supporting hole 526 of the driving side arm member 520 and the other side shaft supporting hole 533 of the driven side arm member 530, and the driving side arm member 520. The driving force for swinging And a front plate member 560 that is disposed on the front side of the base member 510 with the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 interposed therebetween and to which the drive motor 551 is fastened and fixed. Prepare.

  The base member 510 has a plate-like main body portion 511, a plurality of shaft support portions 512 protruding in a columnar shape from the right side of the main body portion 511 in front view, and a lowermost first of the shaft support portions 512. A drive gear receiving hole 513 formed on the left side of the triaxial portion 512c in front view, a photosensor 514 disposed on the right side of the shaft support portion 512, and a rectangular shape from the left side portion of the main body portion 511 in front view to the front side. And a lower support portion 515 protruding in a shape.

  The main body portion 511 is formed so that the height of the upper end portion is different between the left side and the right side when viewed from the front of the first shaft portion 512a. That is, a step-down portion 511a with the upper side surface lowered by one step is provided on the left side of the first shaft portion 512a in front view.

  The step-down portion 511a has the effect of expanding the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in a state where the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 8). Further, in the state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position, for example, when the driven arm member 530 falls backward, the area where the driven arm member 530 and the main body 511 may come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. It can be reduced (see FIG. 39). Thereby, when the moving member 540 moves from the retracted position toward the extended position, or when the moving member 540 moves from the extended position toward the retracted position, the driven arm member 530 and the main body 511 are moved. The area that may be rubbed can be reduced, and the moving member 540 can be smoothly moved.

  The shaft support portion 512 is formed of three rod members that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and whose shafts are parallel to each other, and in order from the top, one end portion of the driven arm member is pivotally supported. A shaft portion 512a, a second shaft portion 512b on which one end of the drive side arm member is pivotally supported, and a third shaft portion 512c on which a transmission gear 553 engaged with the drive gear 552 is pivotally supported. Prepare mainly.

  The drive gear receiving hole 513 is a through hole into which a stepped portion that projects to the back side of the drive gear 552 is fitted.

  The lower support portion 515 is in contact with the lower side of the lower surface of the other end of the drive side arm member 520 in a state where the drive side arm member 520 is disposed at the retracted position, and the other end of the drive side arm member 520 The portion is prevented from further swinging downward.

  The drive side arm member 520 is a member formed from a resin material, and has a main body plate portion 521 formed in a long plate shape, and one end portion of the main body plate portion 521 (an end portion on the right side in front view). ) In which the second shaft portion 512b is inserted, and a semicircle centered on the one side shaft support hole 522 formed below the one side shaft support hole 522. A gear portion 523 having gear teeth engraved on the outer periphery thereof, a sensor passage plate 524 fastened and fixed to a raised portion 521a raised from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 523 to the front side, a one-side shaft support hole 522, A collar member 525 having a through hole arranged coaxially and fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body plate portion 521, and the other end portion (the left end portion in front view) of the main body plate portion 521 are formed in the front-rear direction. The second shaft portion 542b of the moving member 540 is pivotally supported via a collar. A pair of fastening holes 527 including a pair of fastening holes 527a1 and 527b1 which are disposed near the other end of the main body plate 521 and are drilled in the front-rear direction. 527 mainly includes a bridge member 528 through which the insertion portions 528a2 and 528b2 are inserted and fastened.

  The main body plate portion 521 includes a raised portion 521a at one end portion (right end portion in FIG. 40) which is inserted into the guide hole portion 563 and to which the sensor passage plate 524 is fastened and fixed at the tip.

  The gear portion 523 is a portion that meshes with the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 of the driving device 550 (see FIG. 48), and includes an umbrella portion 523a that covers the front side.

  In this embodiment, the umbrella part 523a is formed so as to cover the entire gear teeth 523 (see FIG. 48). However, the umbrella portion 523a does not necessarily need to cover the entire gear teeth 523, and is formed in such a manner as to cover at least the gear teeth of the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553, so that the umbrella portion 523a becomes the second gear portion. It becomes possible to come into contact with 553b, and the wobbling of the drive side arm member 520 can be prevented.

  The sensor passage plate 524 is a member disposed on the front side of the front plate member 560 in the assembled state (see FIG. 42), and is a fastening portion that is raised and fastened to one end of the main body plate portion 521. 524a and a sensor passage plate portion 524b extending from the fastening portion 524a in the radial direction around the one-side shaft support hole 522 in the assembled state.

  The sensor passage plate portion 524b is a member that is disposed opposite to the front side surface of the front plate member 560 and that passes through the inside of the photosensor 514. Here, the sensor passage plate portion 524b can come into contact with the front side surface of the front plate member 560, and the sensor passage plate portion 524b comes into contact with the front plate member 560, so The axis collapse with respect to the biaxial part 512b is suppressed. On the other hand, the sensor passage plate portion 524b is a member that can detect that the drive-side arm member 520 is placed in the retracted position by passing through the inside of the photosensor 514. That is, the sensor passage plate portion 524b can be used for both an increase in resistance to deformation (shaft collapse) of the driving side arm member 520 and detection of the posture of the driving side arm member 520.

  The collar member 525 is a plate-like member formed in a substantially rhombus shape whose outer shape is rounded, and a main body portion 525a having a circular outer shape whose diameter is an end portion in the short direction of the outer shape, and its main body An outer fitting hole 525b drilled in the center of the portion 525a, a pair of fastening portions 525c that are disposed on both the left and right sides of the main body portion 525a, are formed with tapered tips, and are fastened and fixed to the main body plate portion 521; Is mainly provided.

  The pair of fastening hole portions 527 includes a first fastening hole portion 527a to which the first bridging member 528a is fixed and a second fastening hole portion 527b to which the second bridging member 528b is fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the pair of fastening holes 527 are formed on the other side shaft support portion 526 side (the side on which the moving member 540 is disposed) of the driving side arm member 520, so A long distance from the support hole 522 can be secured. Therefore, as will be described later, even when the driven arm member 530 abuts on the bridge member 528 and the drive side arm member 520 may be twisted and deformed, the deformation is fixed by the fastening hole 527 and the one side shaft support hole 522. Can be generated by using a long distance between them (the twist angle per predetermined length in the longitudinal direction can be reduced). In this case, a load applied to the second shaft portion 512b from the one-side shaft support hole 522 (a load in a direction in which the second shaft portion 512b is folded and folded) can be suppressed, and the durability of the second shaft portion 512b is improved. be able to.

  The first fastening hole 527a is formed adjacent to the first fastening hole 527a1 to which the first bridging member 528a is fastened and fixed, and the auxiliary projection 528a3 is inserted. And a first pinning hole 527a2 in which the first bridge member 528a is fixed in a non-rotatable manner.

  The first fastening hole 527a1 and the first pinning hole 527a2 are disposed along a line that forms a predetermined angle θ1 (θ1 <90 degrees) with respect to the short side direction of the driving side arm member 520 (see FIG. 43). .

  The second fastening hole 527b is formed adjacent to the second fastening hole 527b1 to which the second bridging member 528b is fastened and fixed, and the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is inserted therethrough. A second pinning hole 527b2 in which the second bridging member 528b is fixed in a non-rotatable manner, and a base portion 527b3 formed in such a manner that the outer edges of the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pinning hole 527b2 are raised to the front side. .

  The second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pinning hole 527b2 are arranged along a line that forms a predetermined angle θ2 (θ2 <90 degrees) with respect to the short side direction of the drive side arm member 520 (see FIG. 43). . That is, when the second bridge member 528b bends and deforms toward the front side in FIG. 43, the load applied to the drive side arm member 520 is defined as the twist direction (the direction of rotation about the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520). It can be divided by the bending direction (direction in which the drive side arm member 520 is bent to the front side). Accordingly, when the second bridge member 528b receives a load from the driven arm member 530 and is deformed by bending, it is possible to suppress the drive side arm member 520 from being twisted and deformed around the longitudinal direction.

  The bridge member 528 is disposed on the opposite side of the other-side shaft support portion 526 with the first bridge member 528a disposed on the side closer to the other-side shaft support portion 526 and the first bridge member 528a interposed therebetween. And a second bridge member 528b which is formed larger (longer and wider in the short direction) than the first bridge member 528a.

  The first bridge member 528a has a main body portion 528a1 formed in a long plate shape, an insertion portion 528a2 inserted into the first fastening hole 527a1 and fastened and fixed, and protruded adjacent to the insertion portion 528a2. The auxiliary projection 528a3 to be formed, the rib portion 528a4 formed along the side edge near the other side shaft support hole 526 of the main body portion 581a1 and projecting toward the back side, and the end of the rib portion 528a4 And an inclined portion 528a5 which is inclined with respect to the projecting direction.

  The main body 528a1 is formed with a length that covers the driven arm member 530 in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 48).

  The auxiliary protrusion 528a3 is a portion that is inserted into a first pinning hole 527a2 that is formed adjacent to the first fastening hole 527a1 of the main body plate portion 521, whereby the bridge member 528 is inserted into the main body plate portion 521. Two points are supported. Therefore, the bridge member 528 can be fixed to the main body plate portion 521 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

  The rib portion 528a4 is not formed up to the tip of the main body portion 528a1, thereby suppressing contact with the driven arm member 530 at the retracted position (see FIG. 48), and driven arm at the extended position (see FIG. 50). It is formed in such a manner that it can easily come into contact with the member 530. Details thereof will be described later.

  The second bridge member 528b protrudes adjacent to the main body portion 528b1 formed in a long plate shape, the insertion portion 528b2 inserted into the second fastening hole 527b1 and fastened and fixed, and the insertion portion 528b2. An auxiliary projection 528b3, a rib portion 528b4 formed along the side edge near the other-side shaft support hole 526 of the main body portion 581b1, and projecting toward the back side, and an end portion of the rib portion 528b4 And an inclined portion 528b5 that is inclined with respect to the projecting direction.

  The main body 528b1 is formed with a length that covers the driven arm member 530 in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 48).

  The auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is a portion that is inserted into a second pinning hole 527b2 formed adjacent to the second fastening hole 527b1 of the main body plate portion 521, whereby the bridging member 528 is inserted into the main body plate portion 521. Two points are supported. Therefore, the bridge member 528 can be fixed to the main body plate portion 521 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

  The rib portion 528b4 is not formed up to the tip of the main body portion 528b1, thereby suppressing contact with the driven arm member 530 at the retracted position (see FIG. 48) and the driven side arm at the extended position (see FIG. 50). It is formed in such a manner that it can easily come into contact with the member 530. Details thereof will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the second bridge member 528b has a width of a portion overlapping the driven arm member 530 rather than a width of a portion fastened to the drive side arm member 520 of the main body 528b1 (see FIG. 41). It is formed narrower. Thereby, when the driven arm member 530 comes into contact with the second bridge member 528b, it is possible to suppress the second bridge member 528b from being twisted about the longitudinal direction (flexible along the longitudinal direction). Can be easier).

  Therefore, when the driven arm member 530 and the second bridge member 528b come into contact with each other, the second bridge member 528b can be prevented from being twisted and deformed, and the deformation mode can be limited. In this case, the arrangement position of the portion (second pinning hole 527b2) that prevents the second bridging member 528b from turning over can be limited, and therefore the configuration of the second bridging member 528b can be simplified. . That is, it is not necessary to form the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 (see FIG. 41) in the short direction of the second bridge member 528b with respect to the insertion portion 528b2 (see FIG. 41).

  The driven arm member 530 is a member made of a resin material, and has a main body plate portion 531 formed in a long plate shape, and one end portion of the main body plate portion 531 (an end portion on the right side in front view). ) And is drilled in the front-rear direction at the other end (left end in front view) of the main body plate portion 531 and the one side shaft support hole 532 through which the first shaft portion 512a is inserted. The first shaft portion 542a of the moving member 540 mainly includes the other-side shaft support hole 533 that is supported by a collar.

  The main body plate portion 531 has a front side surface formed on the same plane as the front side surface of the drive side arm member 520.

  The moving member 540 is formed in a block shape that is long in the left-right direction and has a main body portion 541 that is formed with a curved surface with a convex downward surface on the upper surface, and a columnar protrusion on the rear side on the right side of the main body portion 541 in rear view. It mainly includes a pair of shaft support portions 542 provided, and an alignment portion 543 protruding from the right side surface of the main body portion 451.

  In the present embodiment, the moving member 540 is formed so as to be thicker toward the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut (the right side in FIG. 42 (a)). It is formed on the side where the member 540 abuts and at a position separated from the driven arm member 530 to the front side (see FIG. 42).

  The shaft support portion 542 is formed with the same inter-axis distance as the inter-axis distance between the first shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b, and the arrangement of the pair of relative axes in the state shown in FIG. 38 is the first. The shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b are formed of a pair of shafts formed in the same arrangement as the shafts, and mainly include a first shaft portion 542a and a second shaft portion 542b in order from the top.

  The first shaft portion 542a is a portion that is inserted through the other side shaft support hole 533 of the driven side arm member 530, and the second shaft portion 542b is inserted through the other side shaft support hole 526 of the drive side arm member 520. This is the part.

  Here, as described above, the distance between the shaft support holes 522 and 526 at both ends of the drive side arm member 520 and the distance between the shaft support holes 532 and 533 at both ends of the driven arm member 530 are determined. Identical. Further, the first shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b disposed on the base member 510 and the first shaft portion 542a and the second shaft portion 542b disposed on the moving member 540 are relatively arranged. The relationship (the direction and distance of a straight line connecting the axes) is the same. Therefore, a parallel link is formed by the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530, and the posture of the moving member 540 is not changed during the swinging of the driving side arm member 520 (FIGS. 48 to 50).

  The alignment portion 543 is a portion for aligning the relative positional relationship between the pair of moving members 540 when the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position. The moving member 540 on the right side (see FIG. 8) in the front view is formed with a recess that is recessed so as to be able to receive the alignment portion 543 of the left moving member 540.

  The drive device 550 has a drive motor 551 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate member 560 with the drive shaft facing the back side, a drive gear 552 that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 551, and one drive gear 552. The first gear portion 553a at the stage is meshed, and the transmission gear 553 is meshed with the second gear part 553b at the second stage meshed with the gear portion 523 of the drive side arm member 520.

  The transmission gear 553 is a member in which two stages of gear teeth having different diameters are formed coaxially, and includes a first gear portion 553a formed from a large-diameter gear disposed to face the base member 510, and the first gear portion 553a. A second gear portion 553b formed from a gear having a smaller diameter than the first gear portion 553a disposed on the front side of the gear portion 551a, and a hole formed in the center of the first gear portion 553a and the second gear portion 553b. And a shaft support hole 553c that is supported by the third shaft portion 512c of the base member 510.

  The front plate member 560 includes a main body portion 561 formed in a horizontally long plate shape, a holding portion 562 that is recessed in the same arrangement as that of the shaft support portion 512 of the base member 510, and a fastening portion 524a of the sensor passage plate 524. And a guide hole portion 563 formed in an arc shape along the movement locus.

  The holding portion 562 is recessed with a diameter equivalent to the diameter of each column of the shaft support portion 512, and the distal end portion of each shaft portion of the shaft support portion 512 is fitted and fixed. Thereby, since both ends of the shaft support portion 512 can be supported, the shaft can be stabilized. Therefore, the operations of the driving side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the transmission gear 553 can be stabilized.

  The guide hole portion 563 is an arc-shaped long hole through which the raised portion 521a protruding from the driving side arm member 520 toward the sensor passage plate 524 is inserted, and extends in the front-rear direction at the lower end. The stopper wall part 563a is provided. As a result, even if the drive side arm member 520 is displaced in the radial direction with respect to the second shaft portion 512b, the raised portion 521a of the drive side arm member 520 is brought into contact with the guide hole portion 563 and the movement is restricted. The position of the drive side arm member 520 can be stabilized.

  The stopper wall portion 563a is a wall portion for preventing the moving member 540 from swinging beyond the movable range when the moving member 540 is moved toward the extended position (see FIG. 43). is there. When the moving member 540 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 43, the stopper wall 563a, the sensor passage plate 524, and the raised portion 521a (see FIG. 40) to which the sensor passage plate 524 is fastened and fixed are brought into contact. The The stopper wall portion 563a extends not only to the front side but also to the back side. As a result, the contact area between the one end of the drive side arm member 520 and the stopper wall 563a can be increased, and the sensor passage plate 524 and the raised portion 521a to which the sensor passage plate 524 is fastened and fixed at the time of contact. The stress applied to can be reduced.

  With reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, the end of the movable range of the swing operation unit 500 will be described. 42 (a) and 43 are front views of the swing operation unit 500, and FIG. 42 (b) is a side view of the swing operation unit 500 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 42 (a). 42 illustrates a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 43 illustrates a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the posture of the moving member 540 is not changed when the moving member 540 swings from the retracted position to the extended position. Therefore, when the pair of left and right moving members 540 (see FIG. 6) are close to each other (both are swung to the overhanging position), the side surfaces (the right side surface in FIG. 43) that face each other remain parallel. Since they are close to each other, it is possible to easily fit the pair of moving members 540 by fitting the alignment portions 543.

  In a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position, the bridge member 528 is put on the side surface of the driven side arm member 530 on the front side. Further, since the distance between the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is narrowed, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 can be brought into contact with each other when swinging beyond the protruding position. Thus, the swinging of the drive side arm member 520 can be stopped.

  As shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B, the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut in the left-right direction (the right side in FIG. 42). In the direction, the driving arm member 520 and the driven arm member 530 are formed apart from each other.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the bridge member 528 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the driving side arm member 520 is extended in a manner to cover the front side of the driven side arm member 530.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 44, the difference in the fastening location of the 1st bridge member 528a and the 2nd bridge member 528b is demonstrated. Due to the difference in the fastening location, the ease of turning the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b from the driving side arm member 520 is different.

  Here, “turn over” means that the bridging member 528 receives a force from the driven arm member 530 upward in FIG. 44 and is peeled off from the driving side arm member 520.

  44A is a cross-sectional view of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the first bridge member 528a taken along the line XXXIVIVa-XXXIVIVa of FIG. 43, and FIG. 44B is a cross section of XXXIVb of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the 2nd bridge member 528b in the -XXXIVb line.

  First, as a first difference, as shown in FIG. 44B, the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pinning hole 527b2 that receive the second bridge member 528b are different from the first fastening hole portion 527a. A base portion 527b3 is formed. Accordingly, the second embedded width Wb1 that is the embedded width of the insertion portion 528b2 into the second fastening hole 527b1 is longer than the first embedded width Wa1 that is the embedded width of the insertion portion 528a2 into the first fastening hole 527a1. Is done. Therefore, the second bridge member 528b can be firmly fixed as compared with the first bridge member 528a (the second bridge member 528b is more difficult to turn than the first bridge member 528a).

  As a second difference, the first overhanging width Wa2 that is the overhanging width of the insertion portion 528b2 from the main body plate portion 521 in the fastened and fixed state is the overhanging width of the insertion portion 528a2 from the main body plate portion 521. It is shorter than the second overhang width Wb2. Therefore, the second bridge member 528b can suppress deformation near the fastening position as compared to the first bridge member 528a (the second bridge member 528b is more resistant to the first bridge member 528a). It ’s hard to compare.)

  As a third difference, the first fastening hole 527a1 is formed on the opposite side of the driven arm member 530 with respect to the first pin fastening hole 527a2 (see FIG. 44 (a)), but the second fastening hole 527b1 is the second fastening hole 527b1. A 2-pin fastening hole 527b2 is formed on the side close to the driven arm member 530 (see FIG. 44B).

  In this case, the driven arm member 530 moves in the direction (upward in FIG. 44) close to the bridge member 528 (bend deformation, collapse deformation), and is fastened when a load is applied from the driven arm member 530 to the bridge member. There is a difference in how to endure the part.

  That is, when the first bridge member 528a is pushed by the driven arm member 530 and the main body portion 528a1 bends from the insertion portion 528a2, the auxiliary protrusion 528a3 is separated from the drive side arm member 520 (FIG. 44 (a)). Therefore, a resistance force against turning of the main body portion 528a1 is generated by the frictional resistance between the side surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528a3 and the inner surface of the first pinning hole 527a2.

  On the other hand, the second bridge member 528b is pushed by the driven arm member 530 so that the main body portion 528b1 bends with the insertion portion 528b2 as a starting point, and the seating surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 presses against the drive side arm member 520. (See FIG. 44B). Therefore, in addition to the frictional resistance between the side surface of the auxiliary projection 528b3 and the inner side surface of the second pinning hole 527b2, the seating surface of the auxiliary projection 528b3 is the side surface on the front side of the main body plate 521 (upper side in FIG. 44 (b)). The resistance against turning of the main body portion 528b1 is generated by being pressed against.

  Accordingly, the resistance force of the second bridge member 528b against turning up can be made larger than the resistance force against the turning up of the first bridge member 528a.

  Note that the inter-axis distance between the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pin fastening hole 527b2 is formed longer than the inter-axis distance between the first fastening hole 527a1 and the first pin fastening hole 527a2.

  Due to the difference from the first to the third described above, a similar load is applied from the driven arm member 530 to either the first bridge member 528a or the second bridge member 528b toward the front side (upward in FIG. 44). When compared with the first bridge member 528a, the second bridge member 528b has a resistance force at the base portion against turning (a force that can withstand turning up at the fastening position with the driving side arm member 520). growing.

  With reference to FIG. 45, an aspect of contact between the driven arm member 530 and the bridge member 528 when the driven arm member 530 is bent and deformed will be described. 45 (a) is a partial side view of the swing operation unit 500 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXXVa in FIG. 43, and FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c) show the driven side from the state of FIG. 45 (a). It is a partial side view of the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit 500 which showed a mode that the arm member 530 bent to the front side in time series.

  45A shows a state in which the longitudinal directions of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are parallel, and in FIG. 45B, the driven side arm member 530 is on the front side (FIG. 45). FIG. 45 (c) shows a state in which the bent side arm member 530 is further bent to the front side from the state of FIG. 45 (b). A state of contacting the bridge member 528b is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 45, the base member 510, the moving member 540, and the front plate member 560 are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the first bridge member 528a is disposed closer to the moving member 540 than the second bridge member 528b. Therefore, when the upper end of the driven arm member 530 bends to the front side (left side in FIG. 45) due to factors such as the weight of the moving member 540 or contact with other members, the first bridge is first moved in a stage where the amount of bending is small. The driven arm member 530 comes into contact with the bridge member 528a (see FIG. 45B). Thereafter, when the amount of bending of the driven arm member 530 increases, the first bridge member 528a is bent and deformed, and the second bridge member 528b contacts the driven arm member 530 (see FIG. 45C).

  That is, since the displacement of the driven arm member 530 is greater in the portion that is in contact with the first bridge member 528a, a larger load is applied to the first bridge member 528a than in the second bridge member 528b. It is done.

  Here, when the resistance against the bending deformation of the first bridge member 528a is as large as that of the second bridge member 528b, the first bridge member 528a is bent and deformed even if the amount of bending of the driven arm member 530 increases. Otherwise (instead, the drive side arm member 520 is bent). In this case, the driven-side arm member 530 and the second bridging member 528b do not come into contact with each other, and there is a situation where only the first bridging member 528a receives the load from the driven-side arm member 530 alone. The durability of the member 528a is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first bridging member 528a is fastened to the driving side arm member 520 in a manner that the first bridging member 528a is easier to turn at the root portion than the second bridging member 528b. Therefore, the first bridging member 528a is easily turned before the driven arm member 530 comes into contact with the second bridging member 528b (deforms relative to the driving arm member 520 near the root).

  In addition, the width of the first bridge member 528a is narrower than that of the second bridge member 528b, and the plate thickness is formed equal (see FIG. 44). That is, the section modulus of the second bridge member 528b in the same direction is larger than the section modulus of the first bridge member 528a in the direction of the load applied from the driven arm member 530 to the bridge member 528. Is done. Therefore, the first bridging member 528a is more easily bent in the vertical direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 45 (a)) than the second bridging member 528b.

  As a result, the pair of bridge members 528 can contact the driven arm member 530 and receive a load (see FIG. 45C), and the load can be distributed to the pair of bridge members 528 to be borne. Since it can do, durability of the 1st bridge member 528a and the 2nd bridge member 528b can be improved.

  The method of receiving the load from the driven arm member 530 by the pair of bridge members 528 is not limited to bending the first bridge member 528a. For example, by making the first overhanging width Wa2 (see FIG. 44) of the first bridge member 528a longer than that of the present embodiment, the driven-side arm member 530 and the first bridge in the deflection amount of FIG. 45 (b). The pair of bridge members 528 may begin to contact the driven side arm member 530 at the same time with the bending amount of FIG. In this case, both the first bridging member 528a and the second bridging member 528b can receive the load from the driven arm member 530, and the load is applied to the first bridging member 528a and the second bridging member 528b. Can be distributed and paid.

  On the other hand, when the amount of bending is small (see FIG. 45 (b)), the driven arm member 530 does not come into contact with any of the pair of bridge members 528, so it is difficult to suppress the bending of the driven arm member 530. (Until the amount of bending shown in FIG. 45C is reached, the bending is suppressed only by the rigidity of the driven arm member 530).

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the amount of bending of the driven arm member 530 is small, the bending can be suppressed by bringing the driven arm member 530 into contact with the first bridge member 528a (FIG. 45). (See (b)). In addition, as described above, when the amount of bending of the driven arm member 530 increases, the first bridge member 528a is bent and deformed, and the driven arm member 530 and the second bridge member 528b come into contact with each other. Accordingly, the pair of bridge members 528 can receive the load from the driven arm member 530 and can distribute and load the load to the pair of bridge members 528, so that the first bridge member 528a and The durability of the second bridge member 528b can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the front-rear relationship of the driving side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the bridge member 528 will be described. 46 is a cross-sectional view of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 along the line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. 46, for easy understanding, only a cross-sectional view of the elongated portions of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is shown, and the shape of the end portion of each arm member 520, 530 is omitted. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are formed so that the front side surface (the upper side surface in FIG. 46) is substantially flush with the bridge member 528 being the driven side arm member 530. It is put on the front side. Therefore, the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (bend deformation or fall deformation), or the drive side arm member 520 moves toward the back side along the arrow B2 (flexion deformation or fall deformation). Or the drive side arm member 520 can be prevented from rotating (twisting deformation) along the arrow B3. That is, when the bridge member 528 and the driven arm member 530 are brought into contact with each other, the relative movement (deformation) between the driving arm member 520 and the driven arm member 530 can be suppressed.

  Here, the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43) is disposed on the front side of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530, and the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the front side of the arm members 520 and 530. (See FIG. 42). As described above, since the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed closer to the side on which the pair of moving members 540 abut (the right side in FIG. 43), the driven side arm member 530 is more forward than the driving side arm member 520. There is a great risk of falling. On the other hand, when the driven side arm member 530 falls forward, the driven side arm member 530 is supported (contacted) from the front side. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the driven arm member 530 from moving to the front side (the front side in FIG. 43), and accordingly, it is possible to suppress the movement member 540 from moving to the front side.

  Since the driving side arm member 520 is a member to which a driving force is transmitted, there is a possibility that the driving side arm member 520 may wobble in the swing axis direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46) depending on the transmission state. The wobble can be suppressed by the bridge member 528 and the driven arm member 530 coming into contact with each other.

  On the other hand, when the drive side arm member 520 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (bend deformation or collapse deformation) or rotates clockwise (twist deformation) in the direction opposite to the arrow B3, the bridge Since the bridging member 528 is moved in a direction away from the driven arm member 530, it is difficult to suppress the movement of the driving arm member 520. Therefore, it is preferable that there is a mechanism for preventing these movements. Next, referring to FIG. 47, it is possible to suppress the drive side arm member 520 from moving to the front side along the arrow B1 (bending movement or falling deformation), or the drive side arm member 520 is in the direction opposite to the arrow B3. A mechanism for suppressing clockwise rotation (twist deformation) will be described.

  47 is a partial cross-sectional view of the swing operation unit 500 taken along the line XXXV-XXXXV in FIG. As shown in FIG. 47, one end of the drive side arm member 520 is brought into contact with the transmission gear 553 from the front side (upper side in FIG. 47). That is, the gear portion 523 is abutted from the front side of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553, and in addition, the umbrella portion 523a is abutted from the front side of the second gear portion 553b. Here, regardless of the arrangement of the drive side arm member 520, the transmission gear 553 is arranged on the opposite side of the driven side arm member 530 with respect to the straight line connecting the shaft support holes 522 and 526 formed at both ends of the drive arm member 520. (See FIGS. 48 to 50).

  Therefore, when the side of the driving side arm member 520 that is close to the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side (twist deformation in the direction opposite to the arrow B3 in FIG. 46), the gear portion 523 presses against the first gear portion 553a. And the umbrella portion 523a is moved in the direction pressed against the second gear portion 553b. In this case, the deformation resistance of the drive side arm member 520 increases. Therefore, the movement (torsional deformation) of the driving side arm member 520 in the reverse direction of the arrow B3 in FIG. 46 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the sensor passage plate 524 is disposed on the front side of the front plate member 560 at the tip of one end of the drive side arm member 520. Thereby, when the other end portion (right side in FIG. 47) of the drive side arm member 520 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (bend deformation or collapse deformation), one end sandwiching the second shaft portion 512b. The deformation resistance of the drive side arm member 520 can be increased by the sensor passage plate 524 coming into contact with the front plate member 560 at the portion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the other end portion of the driving side arm member 520 from moving in the direction of the arrow B1 (bending deformation or falling deformation).

  As shown in FIG. 47, the collar member 525 is formed with a thickness substantially equal to the thickness of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553. As shown in FIG. 41, the collar member 525 is formed in a shape smaller than the outer shape of one end portion of the driving side arm member 520 in a front view, so that the base member 510 and the driving side arm member are formed by the collar member 525. The contact area with 520 can be suppressed. Therefore, the contact resistance when the drive-side arm member 520 is swung can be suppressed, and the drive motor 551 can be downsized.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, the swinging operation of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 will be described. 48 to 50 are front views of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530. FIG. 48, the state in which the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are disposed at the retracted position is the same as in FIG. 42. In FIG. 49, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm are changed from the state of FIG. FIG. 50 illustrates a state in which the member 530 is swung by a predetermined amount, and FIG. 50 illustrates a state in which the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are arranged at the overhanging position. 48 to 50, the outer shape of the moving member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary line, the sensor passage plate 524 is not illustrated, and the collar member 525 and a part of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553 are hidden lines. While being illustrated, the umbrella portion 523a of the gear portion 523 is partially omitted, and the gear teeth are visible.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the distance between the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is shortened from the retracted position toward the extended position. Therefore, the area that the bridging member 528 covers the driven arm member 530 increases as it moves from the retracted position to the extended position, and the bridge member 528 moves to the front side and contacts the bridging member 528 when the bridge member 528 contacts the bridging member 528. The resistance force generated from the bridge member 528 can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the rib portion 528a4 of the first bridging member 528a and the rib portion 528b4 of the second bridging member 528b are formed on the one side shaft supporting hole 532 and the other side shaft supporting hole of the driven side arm member 530. It is formed below a straight line connecting 533. Therefore, in the retracted position, the driven side arm member that may change its posture in such a manner that the upper part of the straight line connecting the one side shaft support hole 532 and the other side shaft support hole 533 falls to the front side (front side in FIG. 48). The distance between 530 and the bridge member 528 can be kept large. Thus, when the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are started from the retracted position, the driven side arm member 530 is tilted forward and comes into contact with the bridge member 528, so that the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side member are It is possible to prevent the swing resistance of the arm member 530 from increasing.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50, the rib portion 528a4 of the first bridging member 528a and the rib portion 528b4 of the second bridging member 528b are disposed at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction of the driven arm member 530. . Therefore, in the extended position, the distance between the driven arm member 530 and the bridge member 528, which may change its posture in a manner of falling and deforming from the one side shaft support portion 532, can be reduced. Accordingly, at the extended position, the driven arm member 530 and the bridge member 528 can be brought into contact with each other from the amount of deformation of the falling deformation of the driven arm member 530 that is small.

  That is, the rib portions 528a4 and 528b4 suppress the swing resistance when the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 start from the retracted position, and the driven side arm member 530 is disposed at the extended position. In this state, the driven arm member 530 and the bridging member 528 can be brought into contact with each other from the small amount of deformation of the driven arm member 530 that falls down.

  In addition, the bridge member 528 is at least partially disposed on the front side of the driven arm member 530 while the drive side arm member 520 is moving from the state where it is disposed at the retracted position to the state where it is disposed at the extended position. . As a result, while the bridge member 528 is not disposed on the front side of the driven side arm member 530, the driven side arm member 530 moves in the axial direction, and the side surface disposed opposite to the driving side arm member 520 of the driven side arm member 530. And the bridge member 528 can be prevented from coming into contact with each other. In addition, since the driven arm member 530 can always contact the bridge member 528, the effect of suppressing the axial displacement of the driven arm member 530 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are on the side on which the pair of moving members 540 come into contact (right side in FIG. 50). Take a posture inclined to the other side. Therefore, there is a possibility that the drive motor 551 needs to continue to operate in order to maintain the arrangement of the moving member 540 (in order to prevent the drive side arm member 520 from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut (the right side in FIG. 50). Therefore, in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the extended position, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 receive a load from the moving member 540 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thereby, since it can suppress that the drive side arm member 520 rotates counterclockwise in front view, it is unnecessary to continue operating the drive motor 551 in a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position. In addition, the power consumption of the drive motor 551 can be reduced.

  As described above, the transmission gear 553 and the gear portion 523 formed at one end of the driving side arm member 520 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the contact surfaces of the transmission gear 553 and the gear portion 523 are moved in substantially the same direction (left side in FIG. 48) during the swinging operation of the drive side arm member 520.

  That is, the driving force required for the rotation of the gear portion 523 is not only from the meshing with the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553, but the side surface and the gear on the front side (front side in FIG. 48) of the first gear portion 553a. Transmission can also be achieved by contact with the back side surface of the portion 523. In other words, the swing resistance of the driving side arm member 520 is reduced. Thereby, the driving force required for the drive motor 551 can be reduced, and the drive motor 551 can be reduced in size.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the collar member 525 has a longitudinal direction connecting the pair of fastening portions 525c and a short direction which is a right angle direction thereof, and the longitudinal direction is in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520. The drive side arm member 520 is fastened and fixed. Accordingly, the collar member 525 and the base member along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520 are compared with the range in which the collar member 525 and the base member 510 are brought into contact with each other along the short side direction of the drive side arm member 520. The range in which 510 is contacted is increased.

  Therefore, the other end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 48) of the drive side arm member 520 starts from the second shaft portion 512b (see FIG. 40) inserted through the one side shaft support hole 522, and the front and rear direction (FIG. 48). When the deformation is bent in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface, the range in which the collar member 525 is pressed against the base member 510 (see FIG. 40) can be increased. Thereby, the deformation resistance of the drive side arm member 520 can be increased.

  Further, a straight line L connecting the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553 always intersects the circular outer shape of the main body 525a of the collar member 525. That is, it does not intersect with the outer shape of the fastening portion 525c. Thereby, the center distance between the collar member 525 and the transmission gear 553 can be suppressed to a minimum length.

  In other words, it is not necessary to place the fastening portion 525c arranged in the longitudinal direction of the collar member 525 between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553. The inter-axis distance with the central axis of 553 can be formed short. The distance between the axes is a distance at which at least the main body 525a of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear 553 can be arranged to face each other. Thereby, the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of the collar member 525 can be improved, and the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of the drive side arm member 520 can be improved.

  Further, even when the distance between the center axis of the collar member 525 and the center axis of the transmission gear 553 is the same, the fastening portion 525c is located between the center axis of the collar member 525 and the center axis of the transmission gear 553. In comparison, the contact area in the axial direction between the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553 and the drive-side arm member 520 can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the swing operation unit 2500 in the second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the end portion of the bridging member 528 of the swing operation unit 500 is not fixed has been described. However, the swing operation unit 2500 in the second embodiment includes the main body portion 2561 of the front plate portion 2560. A thickening portion 2561a that accommodates the tip of the bridging member 2528 is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 51A and FIG. 51B are partial front views of the swing operation unit 2500 in the second embodiment. 51A illustrates a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 51B illustrates a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position. 51 (a) and 51 (b), the moving member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIGS. 51A and 51B, the main body portion 2528 a of the bridge member 2528 is formed across the width direction of the driven arm member 530. Thereby, when the driven arm member 530 moves to the front side (the front side in FIG. 51) (falling deformation or bending deformation), the area of the main body portion 2528a that contacts the driven arm member 530 is set to the first embodiment. It can be enlarged in comparison, and the movement of the driven arm member 530 can be suppressed.

  The main body 2561 of the front plate member 2560 has a thickened portion 2561a formed by increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 51) at the upper end thereof, and is recessed downward from the upper end surface of the thickened portion 2561a. Storage portion 2561b.

  The housing portion 2561b is a recess that is recessed in a state where the four sides are closed in a top view, and in the state in which the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position, the recess that houses the distal end portion of the bridge member 2528. It is. The inner side surface of the housing portion 2561b includes a movement locus of the distal end portion of the bridging member 2528 (the upper distal end portion in FIG. 51A) (the distal end portion of the bridging member 2528 is moved during the movement of the moving member 540). It is formed in such a manner that it does not come into contact with the inner surface of the accommodating portion 2561b. This prevents the bridging member 2528 from coming into contact with the inner side surface in the rotational direction of the drive side arm member 2520 in the inner side surface of the housing portion 2561b while moving the moving member 540 from the retracted position to the extended position. can do.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the end of the bridging member 2528 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b in a state where the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position. Therefore, for example, when the driven-side arm member 530 moves to the front side (for example, falls and deforms) and places a load on the bridge member 2528, the resistance to the load can be improved.

  That is, when the leading end of the bridging member 2528 is not accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b, the bridging member 2528 is cantilevered and resists the load from the driven arm member 530 (the load toward the front side in FIG. 51). (The bridging member 2528 is fastened to the driving side arm member 2520). On the other hand, when the leading end of the bridge member 2528 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b, a resistance force can be generated by supporting both ends against the load from the driven arm member 530 (fastening with the driving arm 2520). Position and the storage portion 2561b). Thereby, it can suppress that the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side.

  Further, since the bridging member 2528 is fastened and fixed to the driving side arm member 2520, the front end portion of the bridging member 2528 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b, so that the driving side arm member 2520 is aligned in the front-rear direction. be able to.

  In this case, the moving members 540 of the swing operation unit 2500 formed as a pair of left and right can be aligned in the front-rear direction, and the pair of moving members 540 are disposed at the overhanging position (see FIG. 8). , It is possible to suppress the relative displacement in the front-rear direction from occurring in the pair of moving members 540. Since the accommodating portion 2561b is disposed at a position closer to the contact position (see FIG. 8) between the pair of moving members 540 as compared with the driving side arm member 2520, the moving members 540 generated from the accommodating portion 2561b as starting points. Can be reduced.

  Thereby, the effect of correcting the positional deviation between the pair of moving members 540 can be secured, and the pair of moving members 540 can be visually recognized integrally in a state where the pair of moving members 540 are arranged at the extended position. Can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a swing operation unit 3500 in the third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the outer side surface of the umbrella portion 523a of the drive side arm member 520 is formed in an arc shape has been described. However, the swing operation unit 3500 in the third embodiment is stretched outward from the umbrella portion 523a. A protruding portion 3523b is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  52 (a) to 52 (c) are front views of the swing operation unit 3500 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 52 (d) is a swing along the line Ld-Ld in FIG. 52 (b). It is sectional drawing of the operation | movement unit 3500. FIG. In FIG. 52, for easy understanding, only the base member 3510, the driving side arm member 3520, and the driving device 550 are illustrated, and the other members are omitted, and the photosensor 514 and the driving of the base member 3510 are illustrated. Illustration of the sensor passage plate 524 of the side arm member 3520 is omitted.

  FIG. 52A illustrates a state where the driving side arm member 3520 and the moving member 540 (see FIG. 7) are disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 52B illustrates the driving side arm member 3520 and the moving member. 540 (see FIG. 7) is shown rotated by a predetermined angle from the retracted position, and in FIG. 52 (c), the drive side arm member 3520 and the moving member 540 (see FIG. 7) are arranged at the overhanging position. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the drive side arm member 3520 includes an overhanging portion 3523b that extends outward from the umbrella portion 523a in the axial radial direction. The overhanging portion 3523b is disposed below the second shaft portion 512b regardless of the posture of the driving side arm member 3520, and the width between the outer peripheral wall 3516 and the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553. It is formed with the above width (see FIG. 52B). In other words, during the swinging operation of the drive side arm member 3520, either the outer peripheral wall 3516 or the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 is disposed opposite to the back side of the overhang portion 3523b.

  The base member 3510 includes an outer peripheral wall 3516 that is curved and formed along the outer periphery of the umbrella part 523a on the outer side in the axial radial direction of the umbrella part 523a. The outer peripheral wall 3516 is projected from the front side of the main body portion 511 of the base member 3510 to a height equivalent to the side surface on the front side of the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 (see FIG. 52D).

  From these, it is possible to suppress the drive side arm member 3520 from moving to the front side (falling deformation or bending deformation) starting from the second shaft portion 512b of the shaft support portion 512. That is, the driving side arm member 3520 moves to the front side (falling deformation or bending deformation) above the second shaft portion 512b due to the weight of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43), and below the second shaft portion 512b. Moves to the back side (falling deformation or bending deformation). In this case, in addition to the umbrella portion 523a abutting against the front side surface of the transmission gear 553, the overhang portion 3523b abuts against the front end surface of the outer peripheral wall 3516. Thereby, the movement (falling deformation or bending deformation) of the driving side arm member 3520 can be suppressed by contact at two positions.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), when the driving side arm member 3520 is disposed at the extended position, the driving side arm member 3520 is compared with the case where the driving side arm member 3520 is disposed at another position. The contact position in the front-rear direction between 3520 and the transmission gear 553 can be set to a position spaced apart from the second shaft portion 512b in the axial diameter direction.

  That is, when the drive side arm member 3520 is disposed at the overhang position, the umbrella portion 523a is disposed opposite to the front side surface of the gear tooth portion of the second gear portion 553b, while the overhang portion 3523b is disposed in the second gear portion. The main body portion 553b is opposed to the front side surface. In this case, the overhang portion 3523b can contact the main body portion of the second gear portion 553b in the front-rear direction. Such an arrangement is not seen in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b).

  Further, in the state in which the driving side arm member 3520 is disposed at the extended position, the longitudinal direction of the driving side arm member 3520 is along the vertical direction, and thus the weight of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43) is used. This is a state where movement in the front-rear direction (falling deformation or bending deformation) is likely to occur with a large width. In the present embodiment, as described above, the contact position of the drive side arm member 3520 and the transmission gear 553 in the front-rear direction can be set to a position spaced apart from the second shaft portion 512b in the axial radial direction. The resistance force against the movement of 3520 in the front-rear direction can be increased and the movement can be suppressed.

  Next, the combined operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 is a smooth long hole without catching has been described. However, the combined operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment has a recessed portion on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b. 4424c is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a front view of the combined operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position. 53 and 54, the illustration of the collar member of the slide shaft portion 423e is omitted, and the shaft portion is visible.

  As shown in FIG. 53, when the main body portion 410 of the combined operation unit 4400 moves downward from the retracted position and is disposed at the intermediate position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 contacts the inner end portion of the guide hole 4424b. Touch. A recessed portion 4424c, which is a recess capable of accommodating a part of the slide shaft portion 423e, is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b disposed just above the contact position. The recessed portion 4424c is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of curvature of the recessed portion 4424c is greater than or equal to the radius of the slide shaft portion 423e.

  Here, when the main body member 410 moves downward from the retracted position, the shaft support hole 423d disposed at the end of the connecting member 423 opposite to the slide shaft portion 423e moves in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 comes into contact with the inner end of the guide hole 4424b and rebounds, the shaft support hole 423d rebounds in the vertical direction. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e also springs upward due to the vertical rebounding momentum.

  The effect of the recessed portion 4424c will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 54A and 54B are partial front views of the combined operation unit 4400. FIG. 54A shows a state immediately before the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 comes into contact with the inner end of the guide hole 4424b. In FIG. 54B, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is shown. The state immediately after contacting the inner end of the guide hole 4424b is shown. In FIG. 54, the slide lever 473, the solenoid 474, the wiring guide arm 480, and the like are not shown for ease of understanding, and the moving direction of the slide shaft portion 423e and the end portion on the opposite side of the slide shaft portion 423e is omitted. Are shown by arrows C41 to C44.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the main body member 410 is moved downward and the end of the connecting member 423 opposite to the slide shaft 423e is moved downward along the arrow C42, the slide shaft 423e contacts the lower side surface of the guide hole 4424b and slides along the arrow C41. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is not accommodated in the recessed portion 4424c.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the slide shaft portion 423e abuts against the inner end portion of the guide hole 4424b and rebounds, and the end portion of the connecting member 423 opposite to the slide shaft portion 423e is along the arrow C44. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is also pressed upward. In this case, the slide shaft portion 423e comes into contact with the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b and tries to slide along the arrow C43. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is accommodated in the recessed portion 4424c.

  Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e and the recessed portion 4424c can be brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction, which is the longitudinal direction of the guide hole 4424b. In this case, a large resistance can be generated for the slide shaft portion 423e that attempts to move in the longitudinal direction of the guide hole 4424b.

  Thereby, it can suppress that the slide shaft part 423e moves along the left-right direction of the guide hole 4424b. Therefore, the rebound width of the slide shaft portion 423e can be reduced, and the arrangement of the shielding member 420 can be stabilized. Note that the slide shaft portion 423e is driven along the left-right direction inside the guide hole 4424b by moving the main body member 410 (see FIG. 21) upward by the driving device 460.

  Next, the combined operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. In the first embodiment, the case where the end of the connecting member 423 on the slide shaft portion 423e side is in contact with only the guide plate 424 has been described. However, the combined operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment is configured to slide the connecting member 5423. A plate spring member 5425, which is a plate-like spring member that comes into contact with the end portion on the shaft portion 423e side, is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. As the main body member 410 moves downward from the retracted position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves in the left-right direction inside the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 5424.

  The connecting member 5423 includes a protruding portion 5423f that protrudes from the end of the rod member 423a on the slide shaft portion 423e side. The protruding portion 5423f protrudes vertically upward with the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 disposed at the inner end portion of the guide hole 424b, and is also on the right side in the rear view (FIG. 56C). The corner on the right side is rounded and chamfered, and the corner on the left side in rear view is formed with a right angle.

  The guide plate 5424 includes a grip portion 5424c that protrudes in a U-shape from the back side of the base plate 424a at the upper outer end of the pair of guide holes 424b. The holding part 5424c is formed in such a manner that the open side of the U-shaped part is directed inward in the left-right direction, and one end of the leaf spring member 5425 is sandwiched by the inner side surface of the U-shaped part.

  Details of the leaf spring member 5425 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56A to FIG. 56C are partial rear views of the combined operation unit 5400. FIG. 56 (a) to 56 (c), the movement of the connecting member 5423 is illustrated along the time series, and the periphery of the guide hole 424b on the left side in the rear view is partially illustrated. ) Shows a state in which the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 56B shows a state in which the main body member 410 has moved from the retracted position toward the intermediate position by a predetermined distance. In c), the state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position is illustrated.

  For ease of understanding, in FIG. 56, only the decorative member 422, the connecting member 5423, the guide plate 5424, and the leaf spring member 5425 are shown, and the other members are not shown. In addition, the decorative member 422 and the connecting member 5423 are only shown in the outer shape, and the illustration of the internal pattern and the like is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the leaf spring member 5425 is arranged in a posture in which the longitudinal direction is directed in the left-right direction, and one end portion is fixed to a linear plate-like fixed portion 5425a held by the holding portion 5424c. A curved portion 5425b connected to the other end of the fixed portion 5425a and projecting toward the connecting member so as to be bent; and an end portion on the inner side (right side in FIG. 56 (a)) of the curved portion 5425b. And a fall prevention portion 5425c extended to the main.

  The curved portion 5425b is formed such that the first inclined surface 5425b1 formed on the outer side in the left-right direction and the second inclined surface 5425b2 formed on the inner side in the left-right direction have different inclination angles with respect to the left-right direction. In other words, the first inclined surface 5425b1 is gently inclined from the left-right direction (the inclination angle is decreased), and the second inclined surface 5425b2 is rapidly inclined from the left-right direction (the inclination angle is increased to a right angle).

  The fall prevention portion 5425c is in contact with the upper end portion of the projecting portion 5423f in a state where the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 is disposed at the inner end (right side in FIG. 56 (a)) of the guide hole 424b. As a result, even if the end of the leaf spring member 5425 opposite to the grip portion 5424c may hang down due to aging or the like, the projecting portion 5423f causes the leaf spring member 5425 to move in the state of FIG. Since it lifts, the arrangement | positioning relationship between the leaf | plate spring member 5425 and the protrusion part 5423f can be maintained. That is, the end of the leaf spring member 5425 on the opposite side of the grip portion 5424c can be prevented from drooping downward.

  Here, a change in the direction of the force generated between the protruding portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425 during the movement of the connecting member 5423 will be described. When the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 is disposed at the left end of the guide hole 424b, the projecting portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425 are separated from each other, and therefore between the projecting portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425. No force is generated (see FIG. 56 (a)).

  As the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves inward in the left-right direction (right side in FIG. 56A) of the guide hole 424b, the posture of the connecting member 5423 changes, and the projecting portion 5423f becomes the leaf spring member 5425. Gradually approach and eventually abut (see FIG. 56 (b)). The connecting member 5423 continues to move inward in the left-right direction, and the upper end portion of the projecting portion 5423f is gradually moved upward so that the free end side of the leaf spring member 5425 (the right end side in FIG. 56 (b)). The end gradually moves upward.

  When the protruding portion 5423f and the first inclined surface 5425b1 of the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425 are in contact with each other, the force F51 applied from the protruding portion 5423f to the leaf spring member 5425 is the first inclined surface 5425b1 of the curved portion 5425b. It is transmitted in the normal direction. That is, the force F51 is directed in the thickness direction of the leaf spring member 5425, that is, in the direction in which the leaf spring member 5425 is bent. In this case, since a component directed in the left-right direction is small in the force applied to the connecting member 5423 as a reaction of the force F51, the leaf spring member 5425 causes the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 to move to the right. The movement of the connecting member 5423 is prevented from being hindered. Thereby, while the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) reaches the intermediate position, the insertion shaft portion 421c (see FIG. 55) is maintained at the lower end of the guide hole 413 (see FIG. 55). can do.

  When the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 reaches the end portion on the inner side in the left-right direction of the guide hole 424b (the end portion on the right side in FIG. 56C) and rebounds, the projecting portion 5423f is bent by the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425. The second inclined surface 5425b2 is abutted (see FIG. 56C).

  In this case, the force F52 applied to the leaf spring member 5425 from the projecting portion 5423f is transmitted in the normal direction of the second inclined surface 5425b2 of the bending portion 5425b. In other words, the force F52 has a large component facing the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425, that is, the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425.

  Here, elastic deformation in the thickness direction of the leaf spring easily occurs, but elastic deformation in the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring hardly occurs. In the present embodiment, the direction of the force F52 can be directed to the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425 by increasing the inclination angle of the right side surface of the curved portion 5425b to a right angle with respect to the left-right direction. Thereby, the resistance force of the leaf | plate spring member 5425 with respect to the rebound of the connection member 5423 can be increased, and it can prevent that the connection member 5423 moves. Therefore, the connecting member 5423 can be maintained at the end portion on the inner side (right side in FIG. 56C) of the guide hole 424b.

  Further, as described above, the protruding portion 5423f is formed such that the corner on the right side in the rear view (right side in FIG. 56C) is chamfered and the corner on the left side in the rear view is formed with a right angle. As a result, when the corner on the right side of the protruding portion 5423f is in contact with the leaf spring member 5425 (see FIG. 56B), it smoothly contacts (does not bite), and on the left side of the protruding portion 5423f in the rear view. When the corner contacts the leaf spring member 5425 (see FIG. 56C), the protruding portion 5423f bites into the leaf spring member 5425. That is, the left-hand side corner of the protruding portion 5423f fits between the second inclined surface 5425b2 of the leaf spring member 5425 and the fall prevention portion 5425c.

  The slide shaft portion 423e is driven along the left-right direction inside the guide hole 4424b by moving the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) upward by the driving device 460 (see FIG. 21). In this case, the protruding portion 5423f moves away from the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425.

  Next, the combined operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. In the first embodiment, the case where the wiring guide arm 480 that guides the wiring is expanded and contracted has been described. However, in the combined operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment, the wiring guide slide 6480 that guides the wiring can be expanded and contracted by sliding movement. Formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 57 is a partial front view of the combined operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is disposed at the overhang position. In FIG. 57, the extended state of the wiring guide slide 6480 is shown. In the extended state of the wiring guide slide 6480, the wiring W disposed on the inner side of the wiring guide slide 6480 is formed almost linearly with few portions to be bent. Therefore, the required length of the wiring W can be suppressed.

  The wiring guide slide 6480 is supported in the extending direction of the first guide slide 6481 that is pivotally supported about the shaft support portion 472 and through which the wiring W is inserted, and the slide long hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6481. The second guide slide 6482 that is slid along the inside and the wiring W is inserted therethrough, and the third guide that is slid along the extending direction of the slide long hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482 and that is inserted inside the wiring W. A slide 6483 is mainly provided.

  The first guide slide 6481 has a rectangular cylindrical main body portion 6481a in which a substantially rectangular through-hole 6481a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction, and a pair of side surfaces (arranged in the front-rear direction) that are opposed to each other among the side surfaces of the main body portion 6481a. A pair of slide long holes 6481b that are formed so as to face each other along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6481a, and a shaft support portion 472 that is drilled in the front-rear direction at the end of the main body portion 6481a. And a cylindrical column portion 6481d bridged in the front-rear direction to the lower end portion of the through-hole 6481a1 of the main body portion 6481a.

  The extending direction of the slide long hole 6481b and the lower side surface (the side surface on the left side of FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6481a are formed in parallel. The cylindrical portion 6481d is wound with the wiring W from below.

  The second guide slide 6482 is slidably fitted in the through hole 6481a1 of the first guide slide 6481 and has a rectangular cylindrical main body portion 6482a in which a substantially rectangular through hole 6482a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction, and the main body portion 6482a. A pair of slide long holes 6482b formed facing the pair of side surfaces (side surfaces disposed in the front-rear direction) opposed to each other, and formed along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6482a, and the main body portion 6482a And a pair of projecting portions 6482c that project outward from the front and rear side surfaces of the first guide slide 6481 and are inserted into the slide long holes 6481b.

  The extending direction of the slide long hole 6482b is formed in parallel with the lower side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6482a. The projecting portion 6482c is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the slide long hole 6481b.

  The second guide slide 6482 is formed such that the projecting portion 6482c is slidable inside the slide long hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6481. During the movement, the outer surface of the second guide slide 6482 is the main body portion 6481a. The through hole 6481a1 is in contact with the inner side surface. That is, the distance from the central axis of the slide long hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6481 to the inner surface of the lower side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6481a is from the central axis of the projecting portion 6482c to the main body portion 6482a. It is formed approximately equal to the distance to the outer surface of the lower side surface. Accordingly, when the second guide slide 6482 is slid with respect to the first guide slide 6481, the posture of the second guide slide 6482 can be stabilized.

  The third guide slide 6483 is slidably fitted in the through hole 6482a1 of the second guide slide 6482 and has a rectangular cylindrical main body portion 6483a in which a substantially rectangular through hole 6483a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction. And a pair of projecting portions 6483b that project outward from the front and rear side surfaces of the portion 6483a and are inserted through the slide long holes 6482b of the second guide slide 6482.

  The third guide slide 6483 is formed such that the projecting portion 6383b is slidable inside the slide long hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482, and the outer side surface of the third guide slide 6483 is the main body portion 6482a during the movement. Of the through hole 6482a1. That is, the distance from the central axis of the slide long hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482 to the inner side surface of the lower side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6482a is the distance between the central axis of the projecting portion 6483b and the main body portion 6483a. It is formed approximately equal to the distance to the outer surface of the lower side surface. Accordingly, when the third guide slide 6383 is slid with respect to the second guide slide 6482, the posture of the third guide slide 6482 can be stabilized.

  Here, the inner side surface of the first guide slide 6481 and the outer side surface of the second guide slide 6482 are each formed as a smooth surface, while the inner side surface of the second guide slide 6482 and the outer side surface of the third guide slide 6483 are It is formed with a rough surface. In this case, the frictional resistance of the slide movement of the second guide slide 6482 relative to the first guide slide 6481 is formed smaller than the frictional resistance of the slide movement of the third guide slide 6483 relative to the second guide slide 6482.

  As a result, the second guide slide 6482 slides with priority over the third guide slide 6483. That is, when the main body member 410 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 57, the second guide slide 6482 is first stored in the first guide slide 6481, and after the storage is completed, the third guide slide 6482 is stored in the second guide slide 6482. 6483 is stored.

  FIGS. 58A and 58B are partial front views of the combined operation unit 6400. FIG. 58A illustrates a state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the intermediate position (see FIG. 30), and FIG. 58B illustrates a state in which the main body member 410 is disposed at the retracted position. The

  As illustrated in FIG. 58, the wiring guide slide 6480 does not have a portion that may pinch the wiring W, and the wiring W can be prevented from being disconnected. Further, since there is no fear of pinching the wiring W, the arrangement interval between the wiring W and the inner side surfaces of the guide slides 6481, 6482, 6483 can be reduced. Thereby, the width | variety of the transversal direction of the wiring guide slide 6480 can be suppressed.

  With the main body member 410 disposed at the intermediate position, the wiring W remains inside the wiring guide slide 6480 (see FIG. 58A). Therefore, the tension applied to the wiring W temporarily can be removed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a swing operation unit 7500 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of bridge members 528 are fixed to the driving side arm member 520 has been described. However, the swinging operation unit 7500 in the seventh embodiment is the first bridge of the pair of bridge members 7528. The bridge member 7528a is formed to be swingable with respect to the drive side arm member 7520. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 59A and 59B are partial front views of the swing operation unit 7500 in the seventh embodiment. 59A shows a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 59B shows a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the extended position, and the moving member 540 is shown. Is illustrated with imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the first bridging member 7528a, which is the smaller side of the pair of bridging members 7528, is formed in the shaft support hole 7529 formed in the main body plate portion 7521 of the driving side arm member 7520. The shaft is pivotally supported and is urged clockwise by a torsion spring (not shown). The main body plate portion 7521 is the same as the main body plate portion 521 in the first embodiment except that the formation of the first fastening hole 527a1 corresponding to the first bridging member 7528a is omitted, and a shaft support hole 7529 is formed instead. It is formed similarly. The second bridge member 7528b, which is the larger side of the pair of bridge members 7528, is fastened and fixed to the main body plate portion 7521 of the drive side arm member 7520.

  The driven arm member 7530 includes a projecting portion 7534 that projects from the front side of the main body plate portion 531 and contacts the first bridge member 7528a in the swinging direction.

  Here, the drive-side arm member 7520 and the driven-side arm member 7530 are relatively positioned with respect to the shaft support hole 7529 of the projecting portion 7534 in a state where the drive-side arm member 7520 and the driven-side arm member 7530 are disposed in the retracted position. The position changes (similar to the relative movement of the other side shaft support hole 526 and the other side shaft support hole 533 along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 7520, the position changes).

  By swinging the first bridging member 7528a along the projecting portion 7534, the distance between the first bridging member 7528a and the second bridging member 7528b is increased at the extended position (see FIG. 59B). Can be spread. Thereby, when the driven arm member 7530 bends to the front side, the distance between the positions where the bridge member 7528 can abut (the end portion of the first bridge member 7528a and the end portion of the second bridge member 7528b). Can be spread. In this case, the length in the longitudinal direction in which the driven arm member 7530 can freely bend without being brought into contact with the bridge member 7528 can be divided into short portions, and the amount of bending of the driven arm member 7530 (in the front-rear direction). Movement amount).

  As shown in FIG. 59, the distance between the first bridge member 7528a and the other-side shaft support hole 533 can be maintained regardless of whether the moving member 540 is disposed at the retracted position or the extended position. it can. Here, the displacement of the driven arm member 7530 with respect to the driving arm member 7520 is likely to occur in the other-side shaft support hole 533 that is the connection position with the moving member 540, and the displacement width is likely to increase. In the present embodiment, the first bridge member 7528a can be prevented from separating from the other-side shaft support hole 533, and the effect of suppressing the displacement of the driven-side arm member 7530 with respect to the drive-side arm member 7520 can be increased. Can do.

  Further, when the driving side arm member 7520 and the driven side arm member 7530 are disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 59A), the first bridge member 7528a is biased by a torsion spring (not shown). It swings in the direction approaching the second bridge member 7528b. As a result, the drive-side arm member 7520 is moved to the retracted position while the distance between the first bridge member 7528a and the second bridge member 7528b is widened, and the first bridge member 7528a and the other-side shaft support hole 533 are moved. Can be prevented from interfering with each other.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, a game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where light is emitted from the light irradiation device 331c to the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment is an outer rail formed by being planted on the base plate 8060. Light is irradiated near the upper half of 62. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 60 is a front view of a game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60, since the light irradiation device 8610 is disposed outside the outer rail 62, the degree of freedom of decoration of the game area is reduced by the shielding member for partially hiding the light irradiation device 8610. Can be prevented. Further, since the light irradiation device 8610 is disposed in the embedded hole 8013a formed in the game board 8013, the light irradiation device 8610 can prevent the thickness of the game board 8013 from increasing in the front-rear direction.

  From the light irradiation device 8610, light is irradiated to the inside of the game area through the back side of the outer rail 62. A mechanism for changing the traveling direction of the irradiated light to the front side (front side in FIG. 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

  61 is a partial cross-sectional view of game board 8013 taken along the line LXI-LXI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 61, the light irradiation device 8610 mainly includes a main body portion 8611 fixed to the embedding hole 8013a and a light irradiation portion 8612 disposed on a side surface of the main body portion 8611.

  The game board 8013 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has an embedded hole 8013a in which the light irradiating device 8610 is disposed, and extends downward from the embedded hole 8013a over the outer rail 62 along the back of the game board 8013 ( A light projecting passage 8013b which is a recess extending inward of the gaming area, and a mode in which the front end is closer to the lower side (inward of the gaming area) formed at the extending end of the light projecting path 8013b. And a direction changing portion 8013c formed in an inclined manner.

  The embedding hole 8013a, the light projecting passage 8013b, and the direction changing portion 8013c can be formed by processing such as cutting and drilling, or by forming a protrusion having an appropriate shape on the resin mold.

  A light path E81 emitted from the light irradiation unit 8612 is formed inside the light projecting path 8013b and is reflected by reaching the direction changing unit 8013c, so that the traveling direction of the light is changed from the path E81 to the front side (FIG. 61). It changes to the path | route E82 which faces (left side). Here, since the direction changing portion 8013c that changes the traveling direction of light is formed by the game board 8013 formed of a light-transmitting resin material, it is inconspicuous and can reduce the influence on the decoration of the game area. it can. Thereby, the design freedom of a game area can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the light traveling on the route E82 is irradiated from below on the nail planted in front of the game board 8013. Thereby, the shadow formed under the nail by the illumination of the hole can be brightened. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance performance of the area below the nail and to make it easier to see the ball when it passes through the area below the nail, and to reduce the burden that the player feels because the ball is difficult to see. be able to.

  In particular, since the nail implanted in the upper part of the game board 8013 is arranged at a position that is looked up by the player, the reflected light reflected by the nail is directed to the player by irradiating light from below the nail. be able to. In this way, the nail that defines the flow path of the sphere can be used as a member that produces light.

  Note that the lower part (lower half) of the nail is less likely to collide with the sphere, so that the effect on the flow of the sphere is small even if it is processed. For example, by applying crystal processing to the lower part (lower half) of the nail, light can be reflected in a plurality of directions, and the performance performance of the nail can be enhanced.

  In addition, the color of light emitted from the light irradiation unit 8612 is different from the color of the nail (for example, yellow) (for example, red), so that the nail irradiated with light is distinguished from other nails. Can be easier.

  In this case, for example, a plurality of light irradiation devices 8610 (six in this embodiment, see FIG. 60) may be arranged on the game board 8013, and light may be irradiated in order. That is, light is emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 on the right side (second from the left end in front view) after light is emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 on the left end in front view, and then right next (front view) on the front side. Light may be irradiated from the light irradiation device 8610 (third from the left end in view) and may continue in the same manner.

  According to this, the nail implanted in the game board 8013 shines in order along the curved arrow R81 by the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 8610. For example, when it is more advantageous for the player to make a right strike, the player can make a right strike by lighting the nails planted on the game board 8013 in order along the curved arrow R81. Can be signaled. Thereby, since the effect which tells a player where to put a ball | bowl should be given to the nail which forms the flow path of a ball | bowl, the attention power of a nail can be improved.

  Note that the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 8610 is not necessarily limited to the nail. For example, light may hit a windmill disposed on the game board 8613, the through gate 67 (see FIG. 60), or the like.

  Next, a wiring guide arm 9480 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 of the wiring guide arm 480 do not overlap in the front-rear direction except for the shaft support portion, but the wiring guide arm 9480 in the ninth embodiment The overhanging front locking portion 9482f disposed on the second guide arm 9482 overlaps the first guide arm 9481 in the front-rear direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In FIGS. 62 to 64, the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are not shown for easy understanding.

  62 (a) is a front view of the first guide arm 9481 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 62 (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm 9481, and FIG. 62 (c) is a front view of attachment / detachment. It is a perspective view of the locking member 9481f. In FIG. 62 (a), the attachment / detachment front locking member 9481f is partially viewed in cross-section, and the fitting portion between the attachment portion 9481d and the attachment / detachment front locking member 9481f is visible.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the first guide arm 9481 includes a detachable front locking member 9481f that is detachably attached to the attachment portion 9481d, and plate-like arm portions 9481a from both ends of the linear portion of the attachment portion 9481d. It mainly includes a plate-shaped anti-slip plate portion 9481g extending toward the rear side and an other-side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h extending from the back side of the other-side bottom portion 481e2.

  In the plate-like arm portion 9481a, the formation of the notch portion 481a1 (see FIG. 25A) is omitted. In the present embodiment, as described later, the detachable front locking member 9481f is molded separately from the attachment portion 9481d, so that the notch portion 481a1 is unnecessary. Thereby, the intensity | strength of the plate-shaped arm part 9481a is securable.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the attachment portion 9481d includes a fitting recess 9481d1 which is a recess having a semicircular cross section extending in the front-rear direction.

  The fitting recess 9481d1 is a semicircular recess with a semicircular cross section into which a columnar fitting arm portion 9481f2 of a detachable front locking member 9481f, which will be described later, fits in the short direction of the appendage portion 9481d (FIG. 62 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). Direction). As a result, a shape for the fitting recess 9482d1 is added to the molding die of the appendage portion 9481d and pulled out in one direction (FIG. 62 (a) vertical direction on the paper surface), whereby the appendage portion in which the fitting recess 9481d1 is formed. 9481d can be manufactured easily.

  The fitting recess 9481d1 is formed in a semicircular shape having a radius that is the same as or slightly smaller than the radius of the fitting arm portion 9481f2. As a result, the fitting arm portion 9481f2 can be fitted into the fitting recess 9481d1, and the attachment / detachment front locking member 9481f can be prevented from sliding in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d.

  In this case, the contact area with respect to the thickness of the fitting arm portion 9481f2 can be increased, and the frictional force can be increased as compared with the case where the attachment portion 9481d and the fitting arm portion 9481f2 are in contact with each other. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the attachment / detachment front locking member 9481f from dropping from the attachment portion 9481d.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (c), the detachable front locking member 9481f has a long plate-shaped main body plate portion 9481f1 and a plurality of vertically extending columnar shapes from the side surfaces in the thickness direction of the main body plate portion 9481f1. The fitting arm portion 9481f2 is mainly provided.

  Since the detachable front locking member 9481f is removable from the attachment portion 9481d, when the wiring W is replaced, such as when the wiring W is disconnected, the detachable front locking member 9481f is removed to remove the front mounting lock. The trouble of replacing the wiring W by avoiding the member 9481f can be saved, and the replacement of the wiring W can be facilitated.

  The plurality of fitting arm portions 9481f2 are portions that fix the attachment / detachment front locking member 9481f to the attachment portion 9481d by sandwiching the attachment portion 9481d, and are arranged in parallel at intervals slightly shorter than the plate thickness of the attachment portion 9481d. A pair of rod-shaped members are connected in series. When the attachment / detachment front locking member 9481f is fixed to the attachment portion 9481d, the pair of rod-like members of the plurality of fitting arm portions 9481f2 are elastically deformed by being pushed from the attachment portion 9481d, and the attachment portion is caused by the elastic recovery force. 9481d is sandwiched.

  Note that the length of the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is slightly longer than the length of the attachment portion 9481f in the width direction, and is directed toward the fitting arm portion 9481f2 on the other side that sandwiches the attachment portion 9481f at the distal end of the fitting arm portion 9481f2. Thus, a protruding portion 9481f3 is formed. Since the projecting portion 9481f3 is hooked on the attachment portion 9481f, it is possible to prevent the detachable front locking member 9481f from coming off from the attachment portion 9481f to the front side (the front side in FIG. 62A).

  In this case, the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is formed in a columnar shape, and the fitting depression 9481d1 is formed as a depression having a semicircular cross section. The shaft center of the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is brought close to the center of the fitting recess 9481d1. This makes it easy to align the attachment / detachment front locking member 9481f to the attachment portion 9481d, and shortens the time required for attachment.

  The anti-slip plate portion 9481g is a portion that sandwiches the wiring W with the plate-like arm portion 481a, and is formed continuously over the width direction (FIG. 62 (b) vertical direction) of the appendage portion 9481d. The attachment portion 9481d and the plate-like arm portion 481a can be elastically deformed in the thickness direction. The distance between the tip of the non-slip plate portion 9481g and the plate-like arm portion 481a is normally formed to be equal to or less than the thickness of the wiring W, and the anti-slip plate portion 9481g is inserted by inserting the wiring W therethrough. It is elastically deformed and the wiring W is prevented from slipping with respect to the plate-like arm portion 481a by the elastic recovery force.

  The direction of the anti-slip plate portion 9481g is arranged so as to be elastically deformable along the longitudinal direction of the appendage portion 9481d. Accordingly, the wiring W can be sandwiched between the anti-slip plate portion 9481d and the plate-like arm portion 481a in the width direction, and the wiring W can be prevented from moving and rubbing in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d. The durability of the wiring W can be improved.

  The direction of the pair of anti-slip plate portions 9481g is opposite to each other at both ends of the attachment portion 9481d. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the attachment portion 9481d and the wiring W from moving in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d regardless of the moving direction of the wiring W. The anti-slip plate portion 9481g is disposed to face the rib portion N. Thereby, since the wiring W can be suppressed at the intermediate portion (antinode), not at the tip portion of the anti-slip plate portion 9481g, the resistance applied to the wiring W can be increased (see FIG. 64).

  The other-side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is a plate-like portion formed to have the same outer peripheral shape as the other-side bottom portion 481e2, and the other-side tubular portion 481c extends in the circumferential direction of the other-side tubular portion 481c from the back surface of the other-side bottom portion 481e2. And an inclined side surface 9481h1 at the extended tip. As shown in FIG. 64 (a), the extended tip of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h and the end portion of the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 9482 overlap in front view. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from dropping off to the back side (FIG. 64 (a) the back side of the drawing).

  The inclined side surface 9481h1 is inclined to the back side (lower side in FIG. 62 (b)) as the distance from the other side bottom portion 481e2 increases.

  63 (a) is a front view of the second guide arm 9482, FIG. 63 (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm 9482, and FIG. 63 (c) is an LXIIIc of FIG. 63 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd guide arm 9482 in the -LXIIIc line.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the second guide arm 9482 includes an extended front locking portion 9482f extending from the front end portion of the attachment portion 482d in both directions in the thickness direction of the attachment portion 482d, and the attachment portion. 482d and a plate-like arm portion 482a, and mainly provided with a plate-like arm portion 482a and an anti-slip plate portion 9482g extending from the end portion of the plate-like arm portion 482a toward the plate-like arm portion 482a and the attachment portion 482d.

  The overhanging front locking portion 9482f extends to the extended end extending on the opposite side of the plate-like arm portion 482a with the attachment portion 482d interposed therebetween, and the back surface side (see FIG. 63). (C) It has an inclined side surface 9482f1 inclined to the right side.

  Since the technical idea of the anti-slip plate part 9482g is the same as the technical idea of the anti-slip plate part 9482g, the description thereof is omitted here.

  64 (a) and 64 (b) are front views of the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 of the wiring guide arm 9480, and FIG. 64 (c) is a diagram of LXIVc− in FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 1st guide arm 9481 and the 2nd guide arm 9482 of the wiring guide arm 9480 in a LXIVc line. FIG. 64A shows a state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded, and in FIG. 64B, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are rotated and opened. The state is shown. 64A and 64B show the wiring W, and in FIG. 64C, the wiring W is not shown.

  Here, it is desirable to suppress the arrangement area of the wiring guide arm 9480 in order to secure the arrangement area of the other movable accessory. For this reason, it is difficult to provide a margin in a region that accommodates the wiring W (for example, between the plate-like arm portion 481a and the appendage portion 9481d of the first guide arm 9481). In this case, each time the wiring guide arm 9480 is folded or opened, the wiring W rubs against the inner surface of the wiring guiding arm 9480, the wiring W deteriorates early, and the durability of the wiring W is improved. May fall.

  On the other hand, in the wiring guide arm 9480 in the present embodiment, the wiring W is sandwiched between the anti-slip plate portions 9481g and 9482g and the plate-like arm portions 481a and 482a, so that the wiring W becomes the plate-like arm portion 481a. , 482a and appendages 9481d, 482d are suppressed from moving relative to each other. Thereby, durability of the wiring W is securable.

  Moreover, when the 2nd guide arm 9482 deform | transforms with the aspect which twists with respect to the 1st guide arm 9481, the wiring W may also be twisted and there exists a possibility that the durability of the wiring W may fall.

  On the other hand, in the wiring guide arm 9480 in the present embodiment, in the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64B), the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is the second guide arm. It overlaps with one side bottom portion 482e1 of 9482 in the front-rear direction. Here, the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h extends in the circumferential direction of the other side tubular portion 481c along the back surface of the other side bottom portion 481e2 (see FIG. 62B).

  Therefore, in a state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64B), the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h and the one side bottom portion 482e1 are in a positional relationship in which they can abut in the front-rear direction. It is formed. That is, when the second guide arm 9482 is twisted and deformed in the direction in which the one side bottom portion 482e1 is pressed against the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h, the one side bottom portion 482e1 and the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h are brought into contact with the first guide arm 9481. The deformation resistance of torsional deformation increases. In this case, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 can be prevented from being twisted and deformed. Therefore, the wiring W can be prevented from being twisted and deformed, and the durability of the wiring W can be secured.

  In the present embodiment, when the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64A), the overhanging front locking portion 9482f is in front of and behind the appendage portion 9481d of the first guide arm 9481. It is formed in a positional relationship that overlaps in the direction and can contact in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 64C). That is, when the second guide arm 9482 is twisted and deformed in the direction in which the overhanging front locking portion 9482f is pressed against the attachment portion 9481d with respect to the first guide arm 9481, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f and the attachment portion 9481d abut against each other. The deformation resistance of torsional deformation increases. In this case, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 can be prevented from being twisted and deformed. Therefore, the wiring W can be prevented from being twisted and deformed, and the durability of the wiring W can be secured.

  Further, in the case where the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is further extended in the circumferential direction from this embodiment, the second guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64A), and the second The guide arm 9482 and the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h are brought into contact with each other, and the first guide arm 9481 and the overhanging front locking portion 9482f are brought into contact with each other.

  In this case, the back side of the second guide arm 9482 and the other auxiliary bottom portion 9481h are in contact with each other, so that the front side of the second guide arm 9482 can be prevented from falling down. On the other hand, since the front side of the first guide arm 9481 and the overhanging front locking portion 9482f are in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the back side of the second guide arm 9482 from falling down. Therefore, when the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64A), the second guide arm 9482 is twisted with respect to the first guide arm 9481 regardless of the direction. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the same effect can be obtained by adding the overhanging front locking portion 9482f to the back side of the second guide arm 9482. In this case, however, the pair of overhanging front locking portions 9482f is the first. Since the guide arm 9482 is sandwiched, it is necessary to increase the accuracy of the alignment of the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the portion for suppressing the twist of the second guide arm 9482 is formed shifted in the longitudinal direction of the second guide arm 9482, so that the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are aligned. It is possible to reduce the required level of accuracy.

  In the present embodiment, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened from the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64A) (see FIG. 64). (B)), the extending tip of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h may come into contact with the end surface of the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 9482.

  On the other hand, the inclined side surface 9481h1 (see FIG. 62A) is formed at the extended tip of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h, so that the extended tip of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h contacts the end surface of the one side bottom portion 482e1. Also in the case of contact, the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h can be ridden on the back side of the one side bottom portion 482e1 (FIG. 64B, the back side of the paper surface). Thereby, it is possible to easily form a state in which the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64A).

  In addition, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded from the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64B) (see FIG. 64A). In the meantime, there is a possibility that the extended front end of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f may come into contact with the side surface of the attachment portion 9481d.

  On the other hand, an inclined side surface 9482f1 (see FIG. 63C) is formed at the extended front end of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f, so that the extended front end of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f is connected to the attachment portion 9481d. Even when it comes into contact with the side surface, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f can be ridden on the front side of the attachment portion 9481d (FIG. 64 (a) front side of the paper surface) (see FIG. 64 (c)). Thereby, it is possible to easily form a state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64A).

  In the present embodiment, the case where the overhanging front locking portion 9482f that abuts on the attachment portion 9481d is formed on the front side is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f may be formed as a pair on the front side and the back side. As a result, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f can be brought into contact with the attachment portion 9481d regardless of the direction of twist deformation of the second guide arm 9482, and the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are twist-deformed. Can be suppressed.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the gap is formed by the pair of decorative members 422 of the combined operation unit 400 swinging has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the decoration member 422 may be guided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and the pair of decoration members 422 may be slid in a direction away from each other to form a gap for accommodating the swinging member 430. In this case, the width of the gap formed between the pair of decorative members 422 can be ensured in the vertical direction.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the moving upper lid member 332 of the panel surface lower unit 300 slides in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a long plate-like movable member that is pivotally supported on the inner side surfaces of the pair of stepped portions 324a and is formed in a pair of left and right is provided, and the movable member is in a direction in which the pair of stepped portions 324a are connected. Is placed in a posture along the longitudinal direction to prevent the passage of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, and the opening is swung upward or downward from that state to allow the passage of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a. The state may be formed. Moreover, you may comprise the 2nd winning opening 640 instead of the specific winning opening 65a by the same structure.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 331c is reflected to the front side when the movable upper lid member 332 of the panel surface lower unit 300 is in the retracted state has been described. It is not a thing. For example, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the extended state, a portion that reflects light emitted from the light irradiation device 331c to the front side may be formed in the lower portion of the moving upper lid member 332. In this case, the light reflected by the moving upper lid member 332 is not blocked by the sphere, and the light effect can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the alignment portion 543 is combined with the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 by the concave-convex fitting, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a magnet may be provided at a position where the pair of moving members 540 are arranged close to each other, and the moving members 540 may be combined by a magnetic force. In this case, the moving members 540 can be attracted to each other by magnetic force, and it is not necessary to generate the holding force in the drive device 550 when the moving member 540 is disposed at the extended position. Therefore, power consumption of the driving device 550 can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guide hole 413 of the combined operation unit 400 is formed in a straight line has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the guide hole 413 may be formed in a curved shape. In this case, even if the moving speed of the main body member 410 is the same, the swing speed of the shielding member 420 can be moderated.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main body member 431 of the swinging member 430 of the combined operation unit 400 swings has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the swing member 430 may include a slide member that slides in a direction away from the main body member 410, and the decorative member 422 may be accommodated between the slide member and the main body member 410.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guide arms of the wiring guide arm 480 of the combined operation unit 400 are stacked in the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the guide arms of the wiring guide arm 480 may be stacked in the front-rear direction. In this case, since the vertical width of the wiring guide arm 480 can be reduced, the width of the bottom wall portion 211 necessary for housing the wiring guide arm 480 outside the opening 211a can be reduced. Thereby, the arrangement area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be expanded.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the moving member 540 is supported by the pair of arm members of the driving side arm members 520, 2520, 3520, and 7520 and the driven side arm members 530 and 7530 has been described. is not. For example, the moving member 540 may be supported by three or more arm members. In this case, for example, the bridge members 528, 2528, and 7528 are fastened and fixed to the intermediate arm members, and disposed so as to cover the front sides of the arm members at both ends, thereby suppressing the positional deviation between the arm members. Can be improved. That is, of the arm members at both ends, when one arm member pushes one end of the bridging members 528, 2528, 7528 and the bridging members 528, 2528, 7528 bend, the other end is The arm member moves toward the arm member and is supported by the other arm member. As described above, the arm members at both ends work so as to suppress the bending of the bridge members 528, 2528, and 7528, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the plurality of arm members and to stabilize the posture of the moving member 540. Can be made.

  In the first to fifth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, each of the guide arms 481 to 483 of the wiring guide arm 480 includes a columnar portion (for example, the one-side shaft support portion 482b) and a cylindrical portion ( For example, although the case where it is pivotally supported by the other side cylindrical part 481c) was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the portion that supports the columnar portion may be formed by a long hole extending in the longitudinal direction of each guide arm 481 to 483. In this case, in addition to the vertical expansion and contraction in which the guide arms 481 to 483 are bent, the horizontal expansion and contraction in which the guide arms 481 to 483 slide in the extending direction of the long holes can be performed.

  In the first to fifth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, the side surface (for example, plate-like arm portion 481a) below each arm member (for example, first guide arm 481) constituting the wiring guide arm 480. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower side surface (for example, the plate-like arm portion 481a) of each arm member (for example, the first guide arm 481) may have a longer width than the upper side surface (for example, the appendage portion 9481d). In this case, the wiring W can be prevented from sliding off from the lower side surface (for example, the plate-like arm portion 481a) due to gravity.

  In the seventh embodiment and the ninth embodiment from the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the case where the width of the wiring W is shorter than the appendages 481d and 9481d has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the formation of the front locking portion 481f may be omitted, and the width of the wiring W may be longer than the width of the plate-like arm portion 481a and the appendage portions 481d and 9481d. In this case, since a part of the wiring W protrudes from the plate-like arm part 481a and the appendages 481d and 9481d, the wiring W can be easily taken out by pinching the protruding part with a finger (hooking with a finger). Thereby, the maintenance of the wiring W can be performed easily.

  In the seventh and ninth embodiments from the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the case where the widths of the appendages 481d and 9481d are constant has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a portion other than the portion where the front locking portion 481f of the attachment portions 481d and 9481d is fixed may be formed with the same width as the plate-like arm portion 481a. In this case, by making the width of the wiring W longer than the plate-like arm portion 481a, a part of the wiring W can be protruded from the plate-like arm portion 481a and the appendage portions 481d and 9481d. Therefore, the wiring W can be easily taken out by pinching the protruding portion with a finger (hanging with the finger). Thereby, the maintenance of the wiring W can be performed easily.

  Although the case where the recessed portion 4424c is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b has been described in the fourth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the thickness of the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b may be made thicker than the thickness of the lower side surface. In this case, the friction generated between the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b and the connecting member 423 can be increased as compared with the friction generated between the lower side surface of the guide hole 4424b and the connecting member 423. It is possible to suppress the rebound of the connecting member 423 generated when moving to the position.

  Although the case where the recessed portion 4424c is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b has been described in the fourth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a recess capable of accommodating the slide shaft portion 423e may be formed on the upper surface of the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. In this case, when the insertion shaft portion 421c is disposed at the lower end portion of the guide hole 413, the resistance F applied to the insertion shaft portion 421c from the side surface of the guide hole 413 can be increased.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the direction changing portion 8013c is disposed only at the extending end of the light projecting passage 8013b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the direction change part 8013c may be additionally provided in the middle of the light projecting path 8013b. In this case, the light reflected to the front side from the direction changing portion 8013c disposed in the middle of the light projecting passage 8013b and the light transmitted through the direction changing portion 8013c are disposed at the extended end of the light projecting passage 8013b. The light can be divided into light reflected from the direction changing portion 8013c to the front side. That is, since the light emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 can be divided into a plurality of pieces, the number of lights that can be viewed in front view can be increased with respect to the number of light irradiation devices 8610. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning number of the light irradiation apparatus 8610 can be suppressed, maintaining the production effect of the light irradiation apparatus 8610. FIG.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

<First control example>
Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  The symbol, which is a kind of symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, is composed of nine main symbols each having the numbers "1" to "9" and a sub symbol consisting of shell-shaped symbols. It is configured. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a), on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, as a plurality of display areas, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the upper, interrupted, and lower stages are set. ing. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), on the display screen, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become. Also, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5 are set on the display screen. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same numbers attached to any of the effective lines is formed. When the variation display of .about.Z3 is completed, it is assumed that a big hit has occurred, and a big hit video is displayed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbol with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) corresponds to “probability variation”, and the jackpot A which is 16R probability variation jackpot or the jackpot B which is 4R probability variation jackpot. When it occurs, the same probability variation symbol combination is stopped and displayed. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “ordinary symbols” and when a jackpot C that is a 16R normal jackpot or a jackpot D that is a 4R regular jackpot occurs. The same normal symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

  It should be noted that the mode of the variable display of the symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable symbol display in the symbol columns, The number of symbols and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-described pattern, and for example, only a numeral may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  In addition, when a ball enters the first winning port 64 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. On the third symbol display device 81, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, there is a hold. Indicates that the number of balls is four. Further, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present control example, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls is displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four is set for the number of reserved balls. Only different modes (for example, colors and lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66 and FIG. 67, the super background notice effect which is one of the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. This super-background notice effect is an effect that allows the player to operate the background scroll direction with the selection switch 270. In addition, when a specific image (an image in which a door blinks in the present control example) is displayed in the background image of the super-background notice, it is expected whether or not there is a big hit in the hold by operating the decision switch 270e. A background image (background inside the door) showing the value is displayed. Therefore, a player who wants to know whether there is a big hit in the hold will play a game paying attention to the appearance of a specific image in the background image of the super background notice. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, the background image of the super-background notice can be scroll-displayed in any direction of the player by a switch operation, so that the player can have an impression as if searching in the background image. . Thereby, the interest of a player can be improved.

  FIG. 66A is a diagram showing an example of a background image of the super background notice effect. When the background image of the super background notice effect is displayed, for example, when the right switch 270b is pressed, the background image is scrolled to the right. Here, in this control example, the background image is set to be scrolled to the right based on pressing of the right switch 270b, and then scrolling is continued until the selection switch 270 in another direction is operated. Has been. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the background image may be scrolled according to the pressing time of the selection switch 270. Thereby, it can respond to a player's operation flexibly and can improve a player's interest.

  FIG. 66 (b) shows that when the background image of the super background notice effect described above is displayed (see FIG. 66 (a)), the back image is scrolled to the right when the right switch 270b is pressed. FIG. By scrolling the rear image to the right, the image of the door that is only partially displayed at the right end of the screen in FIG. 66 (a) can be seen in the center of the screen in FIG. 66 (b). It is displayed in the state.

  The image of the door is data that blinks at regular intervals. As a result, when a certain period of time has elapsed with the door being visible as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the door blinks and is displayed as shown in FIG. 67 (a). In this case, when the determination button 270e is pressed, an effect suggesting display of the background inside the door, which is a special image, is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), an image with the door opened is displayed, and the text “Enter the next change!” Is displayed. Here, in this control example, the door blinking display is configured to be performed at regular intervals. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking display interval may be irregular. In this control example, data that blinks at regular intervals is prepared in advance and the door is blinked. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and data that blinks the door based on a predetermined trigger. You may comprise so that it may change into.

  Note that the background inside the door (not shown), which is a special image, indicates the degree of expectation as to whether or not there is a big hit in the hold as described above. Although detailed processing will be described later, the background in the door is displayed until the 20th change is completed after it is displayed. When 20 fluctuations are completed, it is determined again whether there is a big hit in the hold, and the background image is changed based on the determination result. Specifically, when it is determined that there is a big hit in the hold, the same image of the background in the door as the previous one is displayed with a high probability, otherwise the display of the background in the door is terminated. It becomes. Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71, a description will be given of the effect of super reach A, which is one of the super reach effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example. This effect of Super Reach A is an effect that is executed during the variation period of the third symbol, and is an effect that a stop symbol is displayed based on the pressing of the frame button 22.

  In Super Reach A, a disparity display mode is displayed and a small bubble is displayed. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the disparity display mode is a third symbol indicating 6 symbols in which the number “6” is added to the main symbol of the angler on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1. 7 symbols with the number “7” attached to the main symbol of the whale on the right line L3 are stopped and displayed, and 5 symbols are displayed on the left line L1 of the lower symbol row Z3. This is a display mode in which a shell symbol is displayed on the middle line L2 and four symbols are stopped and displayed on the right line L3, and none of the lines (L1 to L5) is reached.

  Next, characters “bubble chance” are displayed, and the dissemination display mode is changed to a double reach display mode. Here, as the double reach display mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the same symbol as that in FIG. 68 (a) is stopped and displayed on the upper symbol row Z1, and on the left line L1 of the lower symbol row Z3. 7 symbols are displayed as shell symbols on the middle line L2, 6 symbols are stopped on the right line L3, 6 symbols are displayed on the lower right line L4, and 7 symbols are displayed on the upper right line L5. It is an aspect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), along with a display of a plurality of bubbles rotating, the text “Stop bubbles with a touch!” Is displayed, and then rotated as shown in FIG. 69 (b). A display that contains symbols (6 symbols, 7 symbols, and special symbols) that are big hits on the bubbles is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (a), the color of the bubble containing the symbol that becomes a big hit changes, and the text “A colored bubble is right!” Is displayed. In addition, an indicator for displaying the remaining time during which the button can be pressed is displayed in the lower right part of the screen.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed within the remaining time during which the button can be pressed, the colored bubble or the uncolored bubble is stopped and displayed. FIG. 70B is a diagram illustrating a screen in which colored bubbles are stopped and displayed.

  When the colored bubble is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 71, the colored bubble changes to a symbol (7 symbols) that is a jackpot, and a jackpot notification is made. On the other hand, when the uncolored bubble is stopped, the pattern is changed to a symbol (for example, five symbols) from which the uncolored bubble is removed, and notification of the separation is made (not shown).

  As described above, in Super Reach A in this control example, the symbol that is a big hit (6 symbols, 7 symbols, and special symbols in the above example) is unified into colored bubbles, and the off symbol (6 symbols, 7 Symbols other than symbols and special symbols) are standardized as uncolored bubbles. Thereby, the player has only to press the button while paying attention only to the presence or absence of color, and an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, the jackpot effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. In this jackpot effect, a map in which squares like sugoroku are arranged is displayed, and the squares on the map can be selected based on the operation of the selection switch 270 or the like. An event is set for each of the selected squares, and a round effect during the jackpot effect is performed based on the mass event. The mass event is set based on the jackpot type, the number of continuations of the jackpot, or the value of the display effect counter 233o.

  Further, when the jackpot continues (when the jackpot is in the probability variation state or the short time state), an effect that continues from the mass selected in the previous jackpot effect is executed. Furthermore, although not a cell selected in the previous jackpot production, a continuous mass that can start (restart) a continuous production is provided. It is determined whether the restart from the continuous mass can be executed based on the history of the mass that has passed. In addition, when all the squares on the map are passed, a new map is displayed from the next jackpot effect. Furthermore, when the jackpot presentation ends (ending), the mass event may be changed depending on whether there is a jackpot in the hold.

  FIG. 72 (a) shows a case where the first box is selected from the start point in the previous jackpot effect, and then the jackpot effect is started continuously (a jackpot is generated during certain change or short time). FIG. Note that a square with “S” in the figure means a starting point, and starts from here when the first big hit. Further, “G” in the figure means a goal point, and the operation when the goal point is reached will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (a), when the continued jackpot effect is started, the effect is continuously started from the mass selected in the previous jackpot effect. When the jackpot effect is started, the square that is the current operation start point (the previously selected square) is lit in a different color from the other squares, and a dog character is displayed. Thereby, the player can easily recognize where the current operation start point is. The manner in which the player can recognize the operation start point is not limited to this. For example, the cell at the operation start point may be displayed in a blinking manner, and the cell may be indicated by a symbol such as an arrow. It may be a thing.

  An arrow indicating the direction in which the operation can be performed is displayed in the vicinity of the square at the operation start point. Thereby, the player can easily recognize in which direction the player can operate. In this control example, an arrow indicating that operation is possible in the right direction and the downward direction is displayed. Here, when the right switch 270b is pressed, a cell to the right of the cell at the operation start point (that is, a cell next to the start point) is turned on and a dog character is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the selection switch 270 corresponding to a direction not shown as an operable direction is operated, it is considered that the switch operation has not been performed, and the display is not changed. In the above case, in order to suggest that the switch operation is invalid, it may be configured to display on the screen or output a sound.

  Here, when the decision switch 270e is pressed in a state in which a cell to the right of the operation start point cell (that is, a cell that is two points away from the start point) is selected, the cell corresponds to the cell event set for the cell. Production is performed.

  FIG. 72 (b) shows a jackpot effect (see FIG. 72 (a)) when the next cell from the start point is the operation start point (see FIG. 72 (a)), after the right switch 270b is pressed, It is a figure which shows an example of the effect at the time of being pressed down. In FIG. 72 (b), if it is determined that the next square from the start point is selected based on the operation of the decision switch 270e, an effect corresponding to the mass event set for the square is performed. Specifically, a display suggesting the contents of the mass event “The background that can be selected has increased!” Is displayed in the upper left part of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the player can easily recognize the contents of the mass event.

  Further, when the continued jackpot effect is started, the previous map and mass event are read, and a new mass event is read according to the value of the display effect counter 233o of the display control device 114. When a previous mass event is compared with a new mass event and a new mass event is set, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (a), the text “Continue mass has increased!” Is displayed. Is done.

  Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the mass event has changed. On the other hand, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mass event may be changed so that the player cannot recognize it. Thereby, an unexpected production for the player can be provided, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  With reference to FIG. 73 (b), the display when the jackpot effect is continuously executed after passing through the continuous mass will be described. In the jackpot effect of this control example, when passing the continuous mass provided on the map of the jackpot effect, it is possible to execute the effect (restart) continued from the passing mass in the next continued jackpot effect. Become. Specifically, when there is a route (one or a plurality of cells) that has passed through the continuous mass and has not been passed through, it is restarted from the continuous mass with the unpassed route that is closest to the starting point. The In this case, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), characters “Restart point is here” are displayed, and a square corresponding to the restart point is indicated by an arrow.

  Thereby, a player can be made to recognize easily that the jackpot production continued from the said mass is started. Note that the letters “Done” are attached to the cells that have already passed, and hatched lines are added, and the characters “Not yet” are attached to the cells that have not passed. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily recognize which cell has not passed. By this restart, it is possible to restart not only from the previously selected cell but also from a continuous cell having a route that has not passed, so that it is possible to easily pass a cell that has not passed.

  In addition, a new map is displayed when all squares are passed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), a new map is displayed, and characters “A new map has been found!” Are displayed. This allows the player to easily recognize that a new map has been displayed.

  Further, when it is determined that there is a jackpot in the hold at the end of the jackpot effect (ending), a mass event is set based on the jackpot. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74B, a square that is two squares ahead of the square at the current point (that is, a square that can be reached by generating two big hits) is set as the special square. By setting the next square as the special square, the player will continue the game in anticipation of at least two more jackpots. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78, the effect of super reach B in this control example will be described. 75 and 76 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the effect timing of this super reach B, and FIGS. 77 and 78 are diagrams illustrating the effect of this super reach B.

  The effect of this super reach B is that the character (girl) on the screen has a symbol (shark, shrimp, etc.) in his / her hand (see FIG. 77 (a)). A throwing effect (see FIG. 77 (b)) or a non-throwing effect is executed. When this throwing effect is performed, the symbol you have in hand will change to the next symbol. And if the same symbol as the reach symbol appears, it is an effect of notifying the jackpot (see FIG. 78 (b)).

  In the case of the super-reach B effect, the effect of throwing until the same symbol as the reach symbol appears can be executed based on the operation of the frame button 22. If there is, it is thrown until the same symbol as the reach symbol appears based on the operation of the frame button 22, but it cannot be executed.

  In this control example, when the throwing effect (see FIG. 77 (a)) is executed three times, the effect (see FIG. 78 (b)) for notifying the jackpot is executed. Specifically, when the reach is 7 symbols, it starts from the effect of throwing 4 symbols. When an effect of throwing 4 symbols is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22, the process then shifts to an effect of throwing 5 symbols. Similarly, when the effect of throwing the symbol of 5 is executed, the effect shifts to the effect of throwing the symbol of 6, and when the effect of throwing the symbol of 6 is executed, the symbol of 7 appears.

  On the other hand, in the effect of the jackpot Super Reach B, if the frame button 22 is not pressed down, it will be a big hit despite the fact that the throwing effect was not performed. Different effects (replacement effects) are executed. Here, in the super reach B, it is necessary to operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times before the effect of notifying the jackpot is executed. Therefore, the normal effect is replaced in advance with the replacement effect at a timing (replacement timing) at which the operation of the frame button 22 is considered to be insufficient before the execution of the effect for notifying the jackpot. This replacement timing is variable according to the number of operations of the frame button 22, and will be described in detail later.

  First, with reference to FIG. 75 (a), a case where the frame button 22 has never been pressed in the effect of Super Reach B will be described. When the change of the super reach B is started, the change of the symbol (normal effect) is started. Then, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped in the display mode in which the reach is reached, and the reach effect is started. This reach effect period is a frame SW effective period in which an effect based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is executed. If the frame button 22 is not pressed during this frame SW effective period, the effect for notifying the jackpot is replaced with the replacement effect at the replacement timing. Thereby, even if there is no pressing of the frame button 22 and there is no effect of throwing, the jackpot notification that does not give the player a sense of incongruity can be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (b), the case where the frame button 22 is pressed only once in the effect of Super Reach B will be described. When the change of the super reach B is started, as in the case of FIG. 75 (a) described above, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped in the display mode in which the reach is reached, and the reach effect is started. . Then, based on the fact that the frame button 22 is pressed during the frame SW effective period, an effective effect that is an effect of throwing a symbol is executed. Here, the effect of throwing the symbol (effective effect) or the effect of not throwing the symbol (false effect), which is executed based on the button operation, is drawn based on the effect counter 223i of the audio lamp control device 113. is there.

  When the effective effect is executed, the timing (replacement timing) at which the operation of the frame button 22 is considered to be insufficient before the effect of notifying the jackpot is changed, so the replacement timing is delayed by the delay time dt. The Thereby, it is possible to prevent the effect of notifying the jackpot from being replaced, even though the operation of the frame button 22 is in time before the execution of the effect of notifying the jackpot.

  In FIG. 75 (b), since the frame button 22 is not pressed once after the frame button 22 is pressed, the jackpot is notified at the replacement timing (after change) delayed by the delay time dt as described above. The production will be replaced with a replacement production.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76 (a), the case where the jackpot is notified without the effect of notifying the jackpot is replaced in the effect of Super Reach B by pressing the frame button 22 will be described.

  When the change of the super reach B is started, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped in a display mode in which the symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is 7 as in the case of FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b) described above. Then, reach production is started. Then, based on the fact that the frame button 22 is pressed during the frame SW effective period, an effective effect or a false effect is executed. In FIG. 76 (a), a false effect, which is an effect in which 4 symbols cannot be thrown by first pressing, is executed. Then, the effective presentation is executed by pressing the second time and the third time, and the design of the character is changed to 6 designs. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the stoppable period while the 6 symbols are displayed, a stop display effect that is an effective effect is executed, and a stop display in which the 7 symbols appear is executed.

  On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is pressed when it is not the stoppable period, the effective effect is not executed, and the false effect is executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the stop display effect from being executed at an early timing such that the display period of the stop display is insufficient.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76 (b), a description will be given of a case where the release is notified without the effect of notifying the jackpot is replaced in the effect of Super Reach B by pressing the frame button 22.

  In FIG. 76 (b), similar to FIG. 76 (a) described above, a false effect and two effective effects are executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 three times during the frame SW effective period. The symbol appears. Here, in FIG. 76A, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the stoppable period, a stop display effect that is an effective effect is executed, and 7 symbols appear. On the other hand, in FIG. 76 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed during the stoppable period, a stop display effect that is a fake effect is executed, and 7 symbols do not appear. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a symbol that is a big hit from being displayed even though the display mode of the super-reach B that is out of place is being executed.

  FIG. 77 (a) illustrates a screen in which the effective rendering based on the frame button 22 is not executed when the reach is 7 symbols in the super reach B as described above. In the upper left of the screen, 7 symbols are displayed in order to indicate that the 7 symbols have been reached. The character in the center of the screen has 4 symbols, and when the effective performance is executed three times, the symbol changes from 5 symbols → 6 symbols → 7 symbols, and is a reach symbol 7 Will be displayed. In the lower right part of the screen, an indicator showing the frame SW effective period is displayed.

  FIG. 77 (b) illustrates a screen on which an effective effect has been executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 when 4 symbols are displayed in the frame SW effective period of Super Reach B, as described above. It is a thing. An effect in which the character in the center of the screen throws four symbols based on the operation of the frame button 22 is displayed.

  FIG. 78A is a diagram showing an example of a screen that has been a big hit due to the above-described replacement effect. The jackpot notification by the replacement effect is executed when the jackpot is won even though the operation of the frame button 22 is not executed. In this case, since the operation of the frame button 22 has not been executed, the stop display is performed in a detached manner. Therefore, in the present control example, after the stop display, an effect of notifying the jackpot where the characters “revival jackpot” is displayed as shown in FIG. Thereby, it can be made to recognize that it is a jackpot production which made the player appear to be off. As a result, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity felt by the player by notifying the jackpot despite being stopped and displayed in an off-state.

  FIG. 78 (b) is a diagram illustrating an effect in which a jackpot is notified by a normal effect that is not replaced. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), this effect is a diagram when a jackpot symbol appears by pressing the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times during the frame SW effective period. In FIG. 78 (b), 6 symbols are thrown to the upper right of the screen based on the pressing of the frame button 22 during the stoppable period.

<Electric Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 79, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 100). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203h of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a first winning port 64 is provided. Alternatively, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selecting counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second winning opening 640, respectively. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a sphere is normally used. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the symbol start port (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 100).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and the RAM 203 is at the timing when the ball has won the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by 202a, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined. The first random number table 202a includes a special symbol for a low probability (a period during which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability that the special symbol is a big hit from the low probability ( Two types of determination values are included for the period in which the special symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in the table in each state is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol is off. If the random number becomes, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0-2” is the first per random number for the low probability. It is stored in the table 202a (see FIG. 81 (b)). Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “3/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “0-29” is a first per-random number table 202a (FIG. 81 (b) ))). In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “3/40”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value in the ROM 202 are provided. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 81 (c)). As shown in FIG. 81 (c), in the case of a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 24” in the first hit type counter C2 is “jackpot A”. The jackpot type when the random value is “25 to 49” is “jackpot B”. The jackpot type when the random value is “50 to 74” is “big jack C”, and the jackpot type when the random value is “75 to 99” is “jackpot D”.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this control example, the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach has occurred, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this control example), and the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of random values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for entering the ball into the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. And a narrow table for low probability is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely off”. Further, in the low probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long production time, it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, and the variation by the third symbol display device 81. The display is easily performed continuously. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the variation time refers to the time from when the variation of the special symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and the symbol is fixed. For example, after a symbol variation of 9.6 seconds is executed, when the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds and the symbol is fixed, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds). It is written as. Based on the variation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 100) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 82A to 82D) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of the symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110 (see FIG. 82 (a)).

  In this variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 82A to 82D), for example, “displacement (for a long time)”, “disconnection (for a short time)”, “disconnection” are used as the variation patterns for removal. Various types of “normal reach”, “outgoing super reach”, “outside special reach” are defined, and variation patterns for jackpots include “per normal reach”, “per super reach”, and “per special reach”. ing. Then, a variation pattern is selected from various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the lottery result and the stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). Note that, as the variation time of the variation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, a variation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is defined.

  Here, the types of super reach will be described. In this control example, “super reach A”, “super reach B”, and various other types of super reach are defined as super reach types. “Super Reach A” is a reach effect that produces an effect based on the player pressing the frame button 22 with the effect screens of FIGS. 68 to 71 described above as an example, and “Super Reach B” is described above. 77 is a reach effect that provides an effect based on the player pressing down the frame button 22, taking the effect screens of FIGS. 77 and 78 as an example.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. , Stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table (FIG. 81 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is If the value matches the random number value set by the second random number table, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  There are 24 random numbers that are hit by a normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second prize opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time”. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning port 640 is opened only “0.2 seconds × 1” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in a random table per symbol for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal symbol start port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the normal symbol having a low probability, and the release period of the second prize opening 640 is further reduced. However, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” becomes very long, so that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning port 640 is opened “only once per second × 2” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 100).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 79, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 100), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 99) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 98) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 50, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a probable change. It has a flag 203e, a time reduction counter 203f, a prefetching probability changing flag 203g, a counter buffer 203h, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640, and includes one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas stores values of a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball has won (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, and the acquired data includes four pieces of data. Among the vacant areas of the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In this control example, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning prize) and the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired according to the starting winning prize, A winning information command including a value is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning data stored in the other reserved areas are stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Then, a shift process for filling the reserved area with the smaller area number is performed. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable symbol display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero. Every time a ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value 4 (see S404 in FIG. 95). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the first special symbol is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 93).

  The value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 93 and S405 in FIG. 95). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d maximizes the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal symbol starting port 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S604 in FIG. 97). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 96).

  When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 97). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (FIG. 97). S603: No).

  The probability changing flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability changing flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 If the value of the probability changing flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). The probability changing flag 203e has an initial value set to OFF, and the main control device 110 sets the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a to close at the final round of jackpot (that is, the jackpot end timing). A value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Specifically, “ON” is set for “big hit type A” or “big hit type B”, and “OFF” is set for “big hit type C” and “big hit type D”.

  When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 59) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the value of the probability variation flag 203e is referred to. If the value is ON, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the determination value for the high probability in the first random number table 202a. On the other hand, if the value of the probability changing flag 203e is OFF, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the determination value for the low probability in the first random number table 202a.

  The hour / minute counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type at the timing of closing the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a in the final round of jackpot (ie, the big jackpot end timing). Is set. Specifically, 100 is set for “big hit type A” or “big hit type C”, and 0 is set for “big hit type B” or “big hit type D”. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is finished until the value of the hour / short counter 203f becomes 0 (S223 in FIG. 57).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour and middle counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, a lottery of a normal symbol is drawn based on a random number table for a normal symbol for a high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / medium counter 203f is 0, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the random number table per normal symbol for low probability (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 62).

  The counter buffer 203h is a buffer area used for counting each counter value as described above.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data described above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. As described above, the ROM 202 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data.

  FIG. 81 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 81 (a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. .

  The first random number table 202a (see FIG. 81 (b)) is a table in which a random number value that is a big hit of a special symbol is defined as described above. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first per random number table 202a includes a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability (a first per random number table 202a for a low probability), and a high value of the special symbol. There is a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at the probability (first random number table 202a for a high probability), and the number of random numbers to be a big hit included in each table is different. Yes. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 81 (c)) is a data table in which determination values of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type are set for each jackpot type. . As shown in FIG. 81 (c), in the first hit type selection table 202b, the big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, and big hit D are set to be selectable, respectively. The value “0-24” of the type counter C2, “25-49” as the jackpot B judgment value, “50-74” as the jackpot C judgment value, and “74-99” as the jackpot D judgment value are set. Yes.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 81 (d)) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 81 (d), when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is determined that it is a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the normal symbol time short state), it is determined that the normal symbol is hit when the value of the second random number counter C3 is in the range of 5 to 204. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”.

  Next, the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 82 (a)) is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a dedicated jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 82 (b)) in the case where the success / failure determination result is a jackpot. If the result is out of play and the game state is normal, a dedicated out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 82 (c)) and the result of the determination is out of control and the game state is probable. Each of them is configured at least by a use (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 82D).

  Here, the various super reach selected by each variation pattern table includes “super reach A”, “super reach B” or other super reach selected by the value of the variation type counter CS1. The type of super reach selected by the variation pattern table is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio control device 113, and transmitted from the audio control device 113 to the display control device 114, thereby performing various super reach effects. Is done.

  Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is already well known and will be described briefly. However, based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough variation contents (variation time, variation type) indicated by the variation pattern command are described. (Reach, miss, etc.)) to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 83, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a power-off. At least a flag 223e, a frame SW effective period 223f, a replacement timing 223g, a replacement flag 223h, an effect counter 223i, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area). In each of these areas, each of the counters C1 to C3 which are winning information is provided. Each value is stored. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, or in the main controller 110, the first special symbol. When the change display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1308 in FIG. 104). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol held ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. . Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1302 in FIG. 104), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1402 in FIG. 105). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1305 in FIG. 104), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1410 in FIG. 105). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The power-off flag 223e is set to ON by receiving a command indicating power failure detection from the main controller 110. Thereafter, in the startup process, when it is determined that the power-off flag 223e is on, the RAM work area is cleared and set to off.

  The frame SW effective period 223f is a counter for indicating a period during which the effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 is possible in the effect of super reach A or super reach B. This frame SW effective period 223f is set when super reach A or super reach B is executed, and SW input monitoring / effect processing executed every 1 ms in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 106). In this case, 1 is subtracted.

  The replacement timing 223g indicates the timing for replacing the effect for notifying the jackpot despite the fact that the frame button was not pressed in Super Reach B. This replacement timing 223g is referred to in the super-reach B operation process (see FIG. 109), and is reset based on the number of executions of the effective effect based on the pressing of the frame button 22.

  The replacement flag 223h is set to ON when a replacement effect is set when it is determined that the replacement timing has passed in the super-reach B operation process (see FIG. 109). Thereby, after the replacement effect is set once, it is determined that the replacement timing has passed again, thereby preventing the replacement effect from being set redundantly. The replacement flag 223h is set off (initialized) when the frame SW effective period becomes zero.

  The effect counter 223i is updated in the main process (see FIG. 103) of the sound lamp control device 113. The effect mode based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is selected by the effect counter 223i.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 104) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 98).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, Fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the start address of the program corresponding to the boot process (see S1901 in FIG. 111) stored in the program storage area 233a and stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the second predetermined address.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 91) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 112B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 40). The main image at power-on is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after power-on. Compared to images displayed during normal games, the amount of data is small and the images are simple. For this reason, it is possible to quickly transfer image data and display an image after the power is turned on.

  When the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a command to start variation during display of the main image when the power is turned on, the display control device 114 On the main image display screen when the power is turned on, the fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol The change image is alternately displayed during the change period. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is “special symbol jackpot”, “○” symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is “out of special symbol”, “×” symbol is displayed after stopping the changing effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the “◯” symbol and the “×” symbol are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 88, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the back image and the back image will be described. FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the two types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 88B shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “city stage” and the rear surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”.

  As the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, as shown in FIG. 88, an image that is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to “city stage” or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 first displays the initial position of the display area between position a and position a ′ of the corresponding back image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, unlike the above-described back surface A and back surface B, a back image (not shown) used for super background notice is an image that can be scrolled not only in the horizontal direction but also in the vertical direction. Thereby, scroll display in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction is possible. The image used for the super background notice can be scrolled and includes an image that changes with the passage of time. Thereby, the display which a specific image (door image) blinks in predetermined time can be performed.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage stores only the image data corresponding to the partial area of the rear surface, that is, the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ′, and the position from the position a including the initial position is set. Since the image between b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, it can be arbitrarily set by the player operating the frame button 22. When the stage is changed at the timing, the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to immediately set the initial positions of the rear B and the rear C to the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it can be displayed while scrolling or changing the color tone over time. It is possible. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the back B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 84) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 84, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described main symbols with numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols is resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the first winning opening 64 is entered. The occurrence of such a state can be suppressed.

  In the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9" is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “Girl” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. Flag 233i, drawing target buffer flag 233j, winning information storage area 233k, gaming state storage area 233m, variation history storage area 233n, display effect counter 233o, continuation counter 233p, back image change flag 233q, super background flag 233r, map storage area 233s, mass setting table storage area 233t, mass event storage area 233u, route history storage area 233w, background addition flag 233x, and the number of changes in the door At least it has a counter 233y.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the discontinuation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop types of the variation effect are jackpots A to D. If it is either, the stop symbol indicated by each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state. As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. As the third symbol is not displayed, the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores a variation effect, an opening effect, a round effect, an ending effect, a final display effect, and a demonstration effect. Here, the details of the data table storage area 233b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the data table storage area 233b.

  First, in the data table storage area 233b, a variation effect table storage area corresponding to a change effect, an opening effect table storage area corresponding to an opening effect, a round effect table storage area corresponding to a round effect, and an ending effect are supported. An ending effect table storage area, a confirmed display effect table storage area corresponding to the confirmed display effect, and a demonstration effect table storage area corresponding to the demonstration effect are prepared.

  Here, the variable effect table storage area is provided with various variable effect display data tables for executing normal variable effects and various stop display display data tables for executing stop display. In addition, various types of display data tables for super reach A for executing the above-described super reach A are provided. Further, various types of display data tables for super reach B for executing the above-described super reach B are provided, and various types of display data tables for throwing display for executing an effective effect used in the effect of super reach B are provided. Various display data tables for false throwing display for executing a false effect are provided, and various display data tables for replacement display for executing a replacement effect are provided.

  In addition, a plurality of types of display data tables corresponding to each effect are provided in other opening effect table storage areas and the like.

  Next, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C (for example, an image corresponding to a super background notice effect) is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this control example, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the top address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 20) "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  In addition, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10, an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 90 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Data is defined (the address “0002H” in FIG. 90 is applicable).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 21, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 91) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 91, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the above power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S1905). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S4405 in FIG. 130 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2201 in FIG. 112B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2208 in FIG. 112 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 112) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 112 (b) S2209) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 113 to 126) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 127 to 130) are executed.

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4301 in FIG. 130A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 130B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 131) for transferring image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 91), which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 91) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 91), which will be described later, with the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 91 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 129) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 91) is created, and transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 91, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be arranged on the most back side, and the last drawn sprite can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this control example, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 112 (b) Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4007 in FIG. 127). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S1902 in FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4513 in FIG. 131). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S4514 in FIG. 131). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4602 in FIG. 132).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 112B) is executed (see S4602 in FIG. 132).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The winning information storage area 233k is an area for storing the winning information received from the audio lamp control device 113, and is used to determine whether or not there is a big hit in the hold at the time of super background notice.

  In the game state storage area 233m, when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the game state is extracted from the received variation pattern command and stored. This gaming state storage area 233m is used to determine whether or not the starting jackpot is a continuous jackpot in the opening command process (S2902) executed in the jackpot related command process (FIG. 118). Specifically, if it is determined that the probability is changing or the time is short, it is determined that the jackpot has been continued. In other cases, it is determined that the jackpot has not been continued.

  The change history storage area 233n is an area for storing a change pattern based on a received command in the change pattern command process, similarly to the game state storage area 233m. This variation history storage area 233n is used when setting a mass event in the map setting process (S3001) in the opening command process (FIG. 119) executed at the start of the jackpot. Specifically, it will be described later in the description of the mass event setting table storage area 233t.

  The display effect counter 233o is a loop counter of 0 to 198, and is updated in the counter update process (S2207) executed in the V interrupt process (FIG. 112) of the display control device 114. This display effect counter is used when a background type is selected in the super background effect process (see FIG. 115), when a mass event is set in the map setting process (FIG. 120), or in the super background SW process (see FIG. 124). Is used when selecting a background type or when selecting a background addition flag to be set to ON in the jackpot SW processing (see FIG. 125).

  The continuation counter 233p is added when it is determined that the jackpot is continued in the map setting process (see FIG. 120) executed at the start of the jackpot effect. Based on the value of the continuation counter 233p and the value of the display effect counter 233o described above, the mass event defined in the mass setting table storage area 233t described later is set. The continuation counter 233p is initialized to 0 when the jackpot continuation ends (when the gaming state becomes normal).

The back image change flag 233q is set to ON in the back image change command processing (see FIG. 122) when a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the rear image change flag 233q is set to ON, in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 131),
The super background flag 233r is set on when the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the super background notice is set on in the back image change command (see FIG. 122). When the super background flag 233r is set to ON, it is determined that the super background notice is being produced. As a result, when the SW-related command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the super background SW process (S3602) is executed in the SW-related command process (see FIG. 123). This super background SW process is a process based on the operation of the selection switch 270 or the like during the production of the super background notice. This super background flag 233q is set to off at the end of the super background notice effect.

  The map storage area 233s is an area for storing information on maps and mass events set in the jackpot effect. This map storage area 233s is an area that is read out when information on the map and mass event is stored in the process at the time of receiving the ending command, which is the end of the jackpot effect, and the continuous jackpot is executed. is there. Thereby, when the continuous jackpot is executed, the previously set map and mass event can be read out, and the continuous jackpot effect can be executed.

  The mass setting table storage area 233t is referred to when a mass event is set in the map setting process (see FIG. 120) executed at the start of the big hit effect. Here, the details of the mass setting table storage area 233t will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the mass setting table storage area 233t.

  The mass setting table storage area 233t stores a normal mass setting table 233t1 and a continuous mass setting table 233t2.

  The normal mass setting table 233t1 is a table that is referred to for setting a mass event when a first-time map is read (when the jackpot does not continue and there is no continuous mass passage history).

  In the normal mass setting table 233t1, patterns of mass events A to C are defined based on the values of the jackpot type and the display effect counter 233o. Here, the jackpot type is determined using information in the change history storage area 233n. For example, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack A” and the value of the display effect counter 233o is “10”, “Pattern B” is set as a mass event.

  Next, the continuous mass setting table 233t2 is a table that is referred to for setting a mass event when a continuous map is read (when a big hit is continuing or there is a continuous history of passage). is there.

  In the continuation mass setting table 233t2, there are set mass event patterns A to E based on the number of continuations (the value of the continuation counter 233p) and the value of the display effect counter 233o. For example, when the number of continuations (the value of the continuation counter 233p) is “5” and the value of the display effect counter 233o is “10”, “pattern B” is set as a mass event. In this control example, there is a possibility that “pattern D” of the mass event may be set when the number of continuations is 5 times or more, and when the number of continuations is 10 times or more, “pattern E” of the mass event. Is configured to be set. Thereby, it is possible to set a special mass event that is set only when the jackpot continues.

  The mass event storage area 233u is an area for storing events of the mass selected during the jackpot presentation. Specifically, when the determination switch 270e is pressed in the jackpot SW process (FIG. 125), the determined square event is stored in the mass event storage area by the process of S3807. The mass events stored in this mass event storage area 233u are referred to in the processing of S3101 of the round number command processing (see FIG. 119) for executing the round effect, and are used for determining the round number display data table. Thereby, the round effect corresponding to the determined mass event can be executed.

  The route history storage area 233w is an area for storing a cell selected (passed) in the jackpot effect. In the route history storage area 233w, information on the selected cell is added when the determination switch 270e is pressed in the jackpot SW processing (see FIG. 125). Thereby, in the map setting process (see FIG. 120), it is possible to determine the presence / absence of a passing history of continuous masses, the presence / absence of non-passing masses, and the like.

  The background addition flag 223x is a flag that is set to ON in accordance with the selected mass event in the jackpot effect. By setting the background addition flag 223x to ON, the corresponding additional background can be set when the back image change command is received.

  The in-door variation frequency counter 223y is an area for counting the number of variations executed during display of the background in the door in the super background notice stage. This in-door variation counter 223y is set to a predetermined value (20 in the present control example) when setting the background in the door, and is subtracted by 1 every time a subsequent variation is executed. When the in-door variation number counter 223y becomes 0, the winning information storage area 233k is referred to, and if there is a big hit in the hold, the same background in the same door is set again with a high probability, and if there is no big hit in the hold, A background other than the background inside the door is set with high probability.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 92 to 101. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first winning opening 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 100) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S209: No), the display content of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or jackpot D is determined.

  In this control example, when the big hit is A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit is B, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the processing of S211 is finished, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S212). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), a special symbol jackpot start is set (S213), and the process is terminated. When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S213, if the jackpot control processing (S904) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 100), the process branches to S1001: Yes, and the opening command Is set. As a result, the big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the process of S213, the probability changing flag 203e is set to OFF, or the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is set to 0. This is because the big hit state is set to the same state as the initial state.

  In the process of S212, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S214), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1. If it is above (S214: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the hour / minute counter 203f (S215), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203f is 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (S104) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and also performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the change effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability changing flag 203e of the RAM 203 is ON (S302). The probability changing flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state. If the probability changing flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state. If the probability changing flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol.

  When the probability changing flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the first per-random number table Based on the jackpot determination value for the high probability of 202a, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 30 high-probability jackpot determination values stored in the first per-random number table 202a. As described above, 30 random numbers of “0-29” are set as the special symbol jackpots at the time of high probability. If the numerical value matches, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability changing flag 203e is off (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 Then, based on the jackpot determination value for low probability in the first hit random number table 202a, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with the jackpot determination value for low probability 3 stored in the first per-random number table 202a. As described above, three random numbers “0 to 2” are set as the special symbol jackpots at the low probability, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the perturbations to be hit by them are set. If the numerical value matches, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode for the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the big hits (big wins) of the four types of special symbols are compared. A to D) is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 24”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (16 round probability variation big hit), and if it is in the range of “25 to 49”, It is determined that it is jackpot B (4 rounds probability variation jackpot), if it is in the range of “50 to 74”, it is determined that it is jackpot C (short round hit bonus for 16 rounds), if it is in the range of “74 to 99” It is determined that the jackpot is D (4 round round short jackpot) (see FIG. 81 (b)).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LEDs 37A and 37B) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to D). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit AD) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, as the fluctuation pattern for losing, `` completely out '', `` outside normal reach '', `` outside super reach '', and `` outside special reach '' are defined, and as the variation pattern for jackpot, `` per normal reach '', Various types of “per win super reach” and “per hit special reach” are defined.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the processing of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  Here, the various types of “win superreach” and “outgoing superreach” include “superreach A”, “superreach B” and other superreach, and are based on the value of the variable type counter CS1. Thus, it is selected in the processing of S307 or S309. In this control example, the super reach type (“super reach A”, “super reach B”, etc.) is selected by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound lamp control device 113 is selected. The MPU 221 may be selected. Thereby, the processing load of MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 can be reduced.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 100). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 92), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first winning port 64. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

  Then, there is no winning at the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first winning opening 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c must be less than 4. If this is the case (S403: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol reservation ball number counter. One is added to the value (N) of 203c (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 100) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, on the basis of the various counter values stored in the process of S406, whether or not the lottery in the special symbol is won (whether it is a big hit), its stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big win), and its fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S407).

  If the process of S407 predicts whether the lottery is a special symbol, a stop type (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot), and a variation pattern, then the predicted lottery is predicted, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408).

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 100) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores these information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probable big hit (S409). In the process of S409, when it is determined that the gaming state is a probable big hit (S409: Yes), the pre-reading probable changing flag 203g provided in the RAM 203 is set to ON (S410), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is not a probable big hit (S409: No), the process proceeds to S411.

  In the processing of S411, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a time and bonus (S411). The flag 203g is set to OFF (S412), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S411, when it is determined that the gaming state is not a time-saving hit (S411: No), the process of S412 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor attached to the second winning opening 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 640a.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). The normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning prize opening 640 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S504). If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S508). The time reduction / intermediate counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In this control example, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot.

  During the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, and therefore the second winning opening 640 provided immediately above the specific winning opening 65a. , The ball is easy to enter. Here, in the present control example, during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not released. Thereby, it can suppress as much as possible that the ball | bowl which was going to win | win the specific winning opening 65a enters into the 2nd winning opening 640. FIG.

  Even if the ball is prevented from entering the second winning opening 640 during the special symbol jackpot, the ball enters the first winning opening 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first winning opening 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S509, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second per-random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 81 (d)).

  In the process of S508, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507 and the low Based on the second random number table for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 81 (d)).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a normal symbol win (S512). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S512: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S514). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S514: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S515). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In this control example, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol falls off The number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so the second prize opening 640 is obtained. Is set to 1 second and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the process of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  If it is determined in step S512 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S512: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S519), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is detected. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S519: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to easily enter the second winning hole 640.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S520 or the processing of S521 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S522 (S522: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S522 (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the normal symbol lottery is won, and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lights up). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S518, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 100) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighted display) in the display mode set in the processing of S513 or S518.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S524). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S525), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S525, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 100) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S516 or S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, and if a ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S603: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball counter 1 is added to the value (M) of 203d (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S605), and this process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S810. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S810 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S810. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S914 of the main processing (see FIG. 100). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S810, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S810). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S811, S812) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S811, S812) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S811, S812) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S811, S812), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S811), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S812). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S813.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is retained in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S813. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S813, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S814), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 92) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) or the start winning process (see FIG. 95) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 95) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 101) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, execution of the big hit effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 96), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S516 in the normal symbol variation processing or the processing of S517 are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S906). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 94), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs 37A and 37B of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the variation time elapses after the variation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94) is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 94). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 96) or the process of S521, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 96), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in S513 or S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 96) ( (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S909: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S901-S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S908, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 98 has been executed, the power-off process after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. The process can be started from S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack in the initial setting process (S801) By setting the pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 100), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) S213 is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1001, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1003). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1003: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol is a big hit (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1007, when the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect when the special gaming state (all 16 or 4 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed.

  In the processing of S1009, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: Yes), an ending command is set (S1010). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot A or jackpot B (S1011), and if the jackpot A or jackpot B (S1011: Yes), a high probability of a special symbol after the jackpot A or jackpot B ends In order to shift to the state, the probability changing flag 203e is set to ON (S1012), and the process proceeds to S1015.

  In the processing of S1011, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not jackpot A or jackpot (that is, jackpot C or jackpot D), in order to shift to the short time state of the normal symbol after the jackpot C or jackpot D ends Then, the probability changing flag 203e is set to OFF (S1013), the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is set to 100 (S1014), and the process proceeds to S1015. In the process of S1015 executed after the process of S1013 or S1014, the end of the jackpot is set and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not the ending start timing in the processing of S1009 (S1009: No), this processing is terminated. With this jackpot control process (see FIG. 101), various settings related to the jackpot can be made.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current startup processing is performed during the power-off processing in S1217 due to an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). It is determined whether or not it has been started (S1102). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 103, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1214 in FIG. 103), it executes a power-off process in S1217. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1217 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1102: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and the power-off in S1217 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1103).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1106. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1103: Yes), the process proceeds to S1104, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1103: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1103: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1104. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1217, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1103: No), and the process proceeds to S1108.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1102: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1217, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1104 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1104, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1104). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1106). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1105: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1107), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1108, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1108). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1217 is executed (see S1216 in FIG. 103). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1217 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1217 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1109), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1111), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1108 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1108 is performed via the processes of S1104 to S1106. This is a case where the process has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: No), S1109, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1110, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1111, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1109 is that when the process from S1104 to S1108 is reached via the process in S1106, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1104. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous processing of S1201 was executed (S1201). If not (S1201: No), the process proceeds to S1212 without performing S1202 to S1311. In the processing of S1201, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1202 to S1311 are mainly processing related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1212 and the variation display setting process of S1213 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1212 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S1213 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S1201 (S1201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1203 to S1213 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1202). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1208 described later are set (S1203), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1204). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1205 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1205, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1206). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, SW input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1207). In this SW input monitoring / production process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 or selection switch 270 operated by the player to enhance the production effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 or the like is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform an effect corresponding to the case. In this process, when an operation by the player such as the frame button 22 is detected, an SW related command based on the operated switch is set to the display control device 114. Details of the SW input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the SW input monitoring / production process is finished, a lamp editing process is executed (S1208), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1209). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1209, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1210). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process in S1208 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1209 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing of S1210 ends, the effect counter 223i is updated (S1211). The effect counter updated here is used for selecting an effect when the frame button 22 is pressed in the above-described super reach B. In this control example, the effect counter 223i is updated in the main process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an interrupt process may be provided and updated.

  When the process of S1211 is completed, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed (S1212). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1213). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1213 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1214). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If it is determined in the processing of S1214 that the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1214: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1216), and the power interruption processing is executed. (S1217). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1218), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1214 (S1214: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1215), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1215: No), the process returns to S1201, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1215: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S1212). This command determination processing (S1212) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1301). When the variation pattern command is received (S1301: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1302), and the variation pattern selection for extracting the variation pattern type from the received variation pattern command is performed. The process is executed (S1303), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 105) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1301: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1304). When the stop type command is received (S1304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1305), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1306). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 105) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1304: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1307). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1307: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). Is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1308). In the process of S1308, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1308 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery has been performed, the start winning is determined. Every time it is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 by the process of S1308. Can be adjusted to the value of. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1408 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1307, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S1307: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1309). If an opening command is received (S1309: Yes), winning information is extracted from the received command, stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1310), and a display winning command based on the winning information is set. (S1311), the process returns to the main process. The display winning command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and displayed in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display winning command, the display control device 114 stores the winning information in the winning information storage area 233k in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1309, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S1309: No), it is then determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1312). When the opening command is received (S1312: Yes), a display opening command for executing the opening effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 (S1313), and the process returns to the main process. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the opening command has not been received in the processing of S1312 (S1312: No), it is then determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1314). When the round number command is received (S1314: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1315), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1316), the process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the processing of S1314 (S1314: No), it is then determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main controller 110, and when an ending command has been received. (S1317: Yes), a display ending command is set (S1318), and this process is terminated. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the process of S1317 (S1317: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1319). ), The process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  By this processing, it is possible to set commands for performing various settings for the display control device 114 based on commands output from the main control device 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the variable display setting process (S1213) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1213). This variable display setting process (S1213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1401). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1406. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1402), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1303 of the command determination process (see FIG. 104). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1403).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1404). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, a selection SW effective period is set based on the high-speed fluctuation period (S1405). Based on the selected SW valid period set here, in the SW input monitoring / production process (see FIG. 106), which will be described later, the super background operation process for performing the switch operation process at the super background notice is executed. Become.

  When the processing of S1405 is completed, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a SW effect (S1406). In the process of S1406, when it is determined that the variation pattern is the SW effect (that is, super reach A or super reach B), the frame SW effective period 223f and the replacement timing 223g are set based on the variation pattern. , The process proceeds to S1408. On the other hand, in the process of S1406, when it is determined that the variation pattern is not the SW effect (that is, super reach A or super reach B), the process of S1407 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1408.

  In the process of S1408, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed (S1408). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1409.

  In the processing of S1409, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1409). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1409: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1409: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1410), and then in the process of S1306 of the command determination process (see FIG. 104), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1411).

  Next, based on the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S1412), and the process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 106, the SW input monitoring / effect process (S1207) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the SW input monitoring / effect processing (S1207). This SW input monitoring / production process (S1207) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and executes the production based on the operation of the frame button 22 and the like. Therefore, a display command based on the operated switch is generated and set.

  In the SW input monitoring / production process (S1207), it is first determined whether or not it is the selected SW valid period (S1501). As described above, whether or not the selected SW is valid is set based on the high-speed fluctuation period in the process of S1405 of the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 105).

  If it is determined in the process of S1501 that the selected SW is valid (S1501: Yes), the super-background operation process, which is an operation process when the super-background notice is being executed, is performed (S1502). Exit.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 107, the super background operation process (S1502) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the super background operation process (S1502). This super-background operation process (S1502) is executed in the SW input monitoring / production process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the switches such as the selection switch 270 in the super-background notice. This is processing for generating and setting a display command based on the operated switch in order to execute an effect based on the operation.

  In the super-background operation process (S1502), it is first determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1601). If it is determined in step S1601 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1601: Yes), a background image change command is set (S1602), and the process ends. The display control device 114 receives this background image change command to change a background image (such as a super background notice image or a normal background image).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1601 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1601: No), it is determined whether the determination switch 270e has been pressed (S1603). If it is determined in step S1603 that the determination switch 270e has been pressed (S1603: Yes), a display determination SW pressing command is set (S1604), and this processing ends. In the display control device 114, the background image is changed to the special background by receiving the display determination SW command during the display of the specific image of the super background notice.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1603 that the determination switch 270e has not been pressed (S1603: No), it is determined whether any of the selection switches 270a to 270d has been pressed (S1605). If it is determined in the processing of S1605 that any of the selection switches 270a to 270d is pressed (S1605: Yes), a display selection SW pressing command is set based on the pressed selection switches (270a to 270d). (S1606), this process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display selection SW command during display of the super background notice, and thereby changes the scroll direction of the super background notice based on the operated selection switch.

  Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1501 that it is not the selected SW effective period (S1501: No), it is determined whether it is the frame SW effective period (S1503). In the process of S1503, when it is determined that it is not the frame SW valid period (S1503: No), the jackpot operation process that is an operation process when the jackpot effect is being executed is performed (S1504), and this process ends. .

  Here, with reference to FIG. 108, the jackpot operation processing (S1504) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation processing (S1504). This jackpot operation process (S1504) is executed in the SW input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the switch operation of the selection switch 270 and the like at the time of the jackpot effect is performed. In order to execute an effect based on the display command, a display command based on the operated switch is generated and set.

  In the jackpot operation process (S1504), it is first determined whether or not the determination switch 270e has been pressed (S1701). If it is determined in step S1701 that the determination switch 270e has been pressed (S1701: Yes), a display determination SW pressing command is set (S1704), and this processing ends. When the display control device 114 receives this display determination SW pressing command when selecting an event mass in the jackpot effect, the event mass is determined and the effect corresponding to the mass is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1701 that the determination switch 270e has not been pressed (S1701: No), it is determined whether any of the selection switches 270a to 270d has been pressed (S1703). If it is determined in the processing of S1703 that any of the selection switches 270a to 270d has been pressed (S1703: Yes), a display selection SW pressing command is set based on the pressed selection switches (270a to 270d). (S1704), this process is terminated. In the display control device 114, when the event mass is selected in the jackpot effect, the display selection SW command is received to change the selected event mass based on the operated selection switch.

  Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1503 that it is the frame SW effective period (S1503: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the frame SW effective period 223f (S1505), and it is determined whether or not the super reach A is changing. (S1506). If it is determined in step S1506 that the super reach A is changing (S1506: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S1507).

  If it is determined in step S1507 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1508), a display valid pressing command is set (S1508), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1507: No), the processing in step S1508 is skipped and the present process is terminated. In the display control device 114, when the display valid pressing command set in the processing of S1508 is received, stop display (for example, FIG. 70 (b), FIG. 71 (a)) is executed in the effect of super reach A. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1506 that it is not super reach A (S1506: No), it is determined whether it is super reach B (S1509). If it is determined in step S1509 that it is not super reach B (No in step S1509), there is no process based on the switch operation, and thus this process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1509 that it is Super Reach B (S1509: Yes), super reach B operation processing is executed to execute processing based on the switch operation during the production of Super Reach B ( S1510), the process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 109, the super-reach B operation process (S1510) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the super-reach B operation process (S1510). This super reach B operation process (S1510) is executed in the SW input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the operation of the frame button 22 in the super reach B. Is a process for generating and setting a display command in order to execute an effect based on (for example, FIG. 77 (b)).

  In the super reach B operation process (S1510), first, it is determined whether or not the frame SW effective period is longer than 0 (S1801). If it is determined in the process of S1801 that the frame SW valid period is greater than 0 (S1801: Yes), the process proceeds to S1803. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1801 that the frame SW effective period is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S1801: No), it is time to end the effect of Super Reach B. The flag is turned off (S1802), and the process proceeds to S1803.

  In the process of S1803 executed after the process of S1801 or S1802, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1803). If it is determined in step S1803 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1803: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1803 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1803: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223i is acquired (S1804), and the data of the winning information storage area 223a is acquired (S1805). The process proceeds to S1806.

  In the processing of S1806, it is determined whether or not the winning information being changed is a big hit (S1806). In the process of S1806, if it is determined that the winning winning information that is fluctuating is a jackpot (S1806: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223i acquired in the process of S1804 is 0-100. (S1807).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1807 that the value of the effect counter 223i is 0 to 100, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining effective presses is 1 and it is not a stoppable period (S1808). In the processing of S1808, if it is determined that the remaining effective pressing count = 1 and it is not the stoppable period (S1808: Yes), a display effective pressing command is set (S1809), and the process proceeds to S1811. . On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1807 that the value of the effect counter 223i is not 0 to 100 (that is, 101 to 198), the remaining effective count is not 1 in the processing of S1808, or it is a stoppable period. Is determined (S1808: No), a display false pressing command is set (S1809), and the process proceeds to S1811.

  In the process of S1811 executed after the process of S1809 or S1810, the replacement timing is updated based on the number of remaining effective presses and the remaining frame SW effective period. Specifically, the super reach B has a replacement timing. When this replacement timing has passed, the remaining effective SW has been pressed many times even though the remaining SW effective period is small (that is, the number of pressing of the frame button 22 is insufficient during the remaining SW effective period). An effect that is determined and suggests a jackpot is replaced in advance. As described above, by providing replacement timing based on the remaining frame SW effective period and the number of remaining effective presses, it is possible to preset an effect that suggests a big hit, and processing when the remaining frame SW effective period has elapsed. The load can be reduced.

  When the process of S1811 is completed, it is determined whether or not the replacement flag 223h is off (S1812). If it is determined in step S1812 that the replacement flag 223h is not OFF (S1812: No), the display replacement command for replacing the effect that suggests the jackpot has already been set. Exit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1812, when it is determined that the replacement flag 223h is OFF (S1812: Yes), it is determined whether the replacement timing has passed (S1813). In the process of S1813, when it is determined that the replacement timing has not elapsed (S1813: No), it is not necessary to perform replacement yet, and thus this process ends. In the process of S1813, if it is determined that the replacement timing has passed (S1813: Yes), a display replacement command is set to replace the effect suggesting the jackpot (S1814), and the replacement flag 223h is set. It is set to ON (S1815), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1806, if it is determined that the winning winning information being changed is not a big win (S1806: No), it is then determined whether or not the effect counter 223i is 0-50 (S1816). In the process of S1816, when it is determined that the effect counter 223i is 0 to 50 (S1816: Yes), a display valid pressing command is set (S1817), and this process ends. In the process of S1816, when it is determined that the effect counter 223i is not 0 to 50 (that is, 51 to 198) (S1816: No), a display false press command is set (S1818), and this process is terminated. To do.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 132. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1901), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S1901) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1901) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2001). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2002). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2001.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2002, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2002, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2003). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2004), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S1901 in FIG. 110). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1902 in FIG. 110) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (see S1901 in FIG. 110), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all configured by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 111, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2001 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2001 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2002. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processes in S2003 to S2005 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2001 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. The process of S2003 to S2005 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the process of S1902.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2003 to S2005 without performing the processes of S2001 and S2002. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 110. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1902). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1903). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1903, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1904). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1904, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (SS1905). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 130A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S4302 in FIG. 130A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112 (b)), the simple command determination process (see FIG. 112) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) is drawn. 112 (b) (see S2208) and simple display setting processing (see S2209 in FIG. 112 (b)).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (start winning), and the main control device gives an instruction to start the variation effect. 110, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image command at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation production period, and a simple fluctuation production is performed. be able to. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1905, interrupt permission is set (S1906), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1906, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112 (b), a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 112B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 91) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V-interruption process, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2201), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2201: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S2202) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2203) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2202), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2203), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2202) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2204). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2203) or the simple display setting process (S2209). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2205). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2206). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2204), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2205) are used. 91 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, counter update processing (S2207) is executed. Details of the counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2207, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2201 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2201: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2208) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2209) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2204.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 126, details of the above-described command determination process (S2202), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 113, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2301). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2301: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2301: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2203) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2302), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S2303).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S2304). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2304: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2305), the process returns to S2301.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S2305) will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (a). FIG. 114A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command process, first, the data in the game state storage area is updated based on the received command (S2401). Next, the received variation pattern is stored in the variation history storage area (S2402), a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored as data. The data is read from the variable effect table storage area (see FIG. 17) in the table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2403).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2403, in order to prepare for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in this control example, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2403 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2404). Of the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2403 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2405). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2405, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2403, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2406), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2407). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2408), the super background effect process is executed (S2409), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing in S2407 is updated, and the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing in S2403 is updated. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of one frame to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2404. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2406, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 115, the super background effect process (S2409) will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the super background effect process (S2409). In this super background effect process (S2409), when the background in the door in the super background notice is displayed, whether the background in the door is to be ended according to the number of variable displays executed during the display of the background in the door. This is a process for determining whether to continue.

  In the super background effect process, first, it is determined whether or not the in-door variation number counter 233y is larger than 0 (S2601). If it is determined in the process of S2601 that the in-door variation number counter 233y is 0 (S2601: No), since the background in the door is not being displayed, this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2601 that the in-door variation counter 233y is greater than 0 (S2601: Yes), the in-door variation counter 233y is decremented by 1 (S2602), and the in-door variation counter 223y is It is determined whether or not it is 0 (S2603).

  In the processing of S2603, when it is determined that the in-door variation number counter 223y is not 0 (S2603: No), this processing ends because it is not the end timing of the background in the door. On the other hand, in the processing of S2603, when it is determined that the in-door variation number counter 223y is 0 (S2603: Yes), data of the winning information storage area 233k is acquired (S2604), and the value of the display effect counter 233o is acquired. In step S2605, the process proceeds to step S2606.

  In the process of S2606, it is determined from the data in the winning information storage area 233k acquired in the process of S2604 whether there is a big hit in the hold (S2606). In the process of S2606, when it is determined that there is a big hit in the hold (S2606: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the display effect counter 233o acquired by the process of S2605 is 0 to 150 ( S2607).

  In the process of S2607, when it is determined that the value of the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 150, the rear image determination flag that is the same as the currently displayed background in the door is set to ON (S2608). Transition to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2607 that the value of the display effect counter 233o is not 0 to 150 (that is, 151 to 198) (S2607: No), the door is different from the currently displayed door interior background. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the inner background is set to ON (S2609), and the process proceeds to S2612.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2606 that there is no big hit in the hold (S2606: No), it is then determined whether or not the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 30 (S2610). In the process of S2610, when it is determined that the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 30, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the door interior background different from the currently displayed door interior background is set to ON (S2611). , The process proceeds to S2612. On the other hand, in the process of S2610, when it is determined that the value of the display effect counter 233o is not 0 to 30 (that is, 31 to 198) (S2611: No), the back image corresponding to the background other than the door background. The determination flag is set to ON (S2613), and the process proceeds to S2614.

    In the process of S2612, which is executed after S2608, S2609 or S2611, the in-door variation number counter 223y is set to 20, and the process proceeds to S2614.

  In the process of S2614 executed after S2612 or S2613, the rear image change flag 233q is set to ON (S2614), and this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2304 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2304: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2306). If there is a display variation type command (S2306: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2307), and the processing returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2307) will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (b). FIG. 114B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2501), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S2502).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2502 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S2503), and the process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2502 is described. In the task process (S2204) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2502 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2503, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2502.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as shown in the present control example, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete disconnection, in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops complete disconnection. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2306 that there is no display stop type command (S2306: No), then reach-related command processing is executed among the unprocessed commands (S2309), and the processing returns to S2301. .

  Here, the details of the reach-related command process (S2309) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing reach-related command processing (S2309). This reach-related command processing (S2309) executes processing corresponding to the reach-related command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the reach-related command processing (S2309), first, it is determined whether or not the changing effect is Super Reach A (S2701). If it is determined that it is Super Reach A (S2701: Yes), the effective pressing is performed. It is determined whether there is a command (S2702).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2702 that there is a valid pressing command, the stop display table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2703), and this processing ends. Here, based on the pressing of the frame button 22 during the effect of Super Reach A, the process of S2703 is executed. By setting the stop display table in the display data table buffer 233d, a stop display (see FIG. 70B) is displayed in the effect of super reach A.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the changing effect is not super reach A (that is, super reach B) (S2701: No), the display super reach B process is executed (S2704). This process is terminated.

  Details of the display super reach B process (S2704) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the display super reach B process (S2704). This display super reach B process (S2704) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and the switches such as the selection switch 270 during the super reach B effect. This is a process for performing a process based on an operation.

  In the display super reach B process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a valid pressing command (S2801). If it is determined in the process of S2801 that there is a valid pressing command (S2801: Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol is a big hit (that is, whether or not the next effective effect will be a big hit) (S2802). .

  If it is determined in the process of S2802 that the symbol is a big hit (that is, a big win in the next effective production) (S2802: No), the stop display table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2803), This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2802 that the symbol is not a big hit (that is, it will not be a big win in the next effective production) (S2802: No), the throwing display table is set in the display table buffer (S2804). The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2801 that there is no valid command (S2801: No), it is determined that there is a false press command (S2805). If it is determined in the process of S2805 that there is a false press command (S2805: Yes), the false throwing display table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2805 that there is no false pressing command (S2805: No), it is then determined whether there is a replacement command (S2807). If it is determined in step S2807 that there is a replacement command (S2807: Yes), the replacement table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2808), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2807 that there is no replacement command (S2807), there is no process based on the switch operation during the production of Super Reach B, and thus this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2308 that there is no reach-related command (S2308: No), it is determined whether there is a jackpot-related command (S2810). In the process of S2810, if it is determined that there is a jackpot related command (S2810: Yes), the jackpot related command process is executed (S2811), and the process returns to S2301.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 118, details of the jackpot related command processing (S2811) will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related command processing (S2811). This jackpot-related command processing (S2811) executes processing corresponding to the display command related to the jackpot effect received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the jackpot related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command (S2901). If it is determined in the process of S2901 that there is a display opening command, the opening command process is executed (S2902), and the process proceeds to S2903. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display opening command, the process of S2902 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2903.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S2902) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, a map setting process for setting a map displayed in the jackpot effect is executed (S3001). Details of the map setting process (S3001) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S3001 is completed, the opening display data table is read from the opening effect table storage area (see FIG. 17) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3002). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S3002 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3003).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3002, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3004), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3005). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3006), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3005, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3002, The drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3003. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required after the opening effect is finished until the round effect is started. There is a risk that time will be generated, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for 16 rounds). If image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display ending command is received, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. May occur, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the operation has stopped, and to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in this control example, when a display opening command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that point, and until the jackpot variation display is ended in the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect ends. Thereby, when the opening effect is finished in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the 3rd symbol display device 81 (for 16 rounds). ) Since the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when it is finished, the player will not feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in this control example, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started therefrom, Control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect ends before the variation effect that is a big hit ends in the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 ends, the opening effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so the player is concerned that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Here, the details of the map setting process (S3001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the map setting process (S3001). This map setting process (S3001) is a process for setting a map that is executed in the jackpot related command process (see FIG. 118) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 and displayed in the jackpot effect.

  In the map setting process, first, data of the game state storage area 233m is acquired (S3301), and it is determined whether or not the acquired game state is in the process of changing probability or time (S3302). If it is determined in the processing of S3302 that the gaming state is in the process of changing or shortening time (S3302: Yes), the continuation counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S3303), and the previous map data is read from the map storage area 233s. (S3304) Based on the value of the continuation counter 233p and the value of the display effect counter, a mass event is selected from the continuation mass setting table 233t2 and set (S3305), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3302, when it is determined that the gaming state is not changing or the time is not short (S3302: No), the route history storage area 233w is referenced to determine whether there is no continuous passage history. (S3306).

  If it is determined in the processing of S3306 that there is no continuous passage history (S3306: Yes), the initial map is read because there is no continuing map (S3307), and the jackpot variation pattern and the value of the display effect counter 233o are obtained. Based on this, a mass event is selected and set from the normal mass setting table 233t1 (S3308), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3306 that there is a continuous mass passing history (S3306: No), it is determined whether there is a non-passing mass (S3309). In the process of S3309, if it is determined that there is a non-passing square (S3309: Yes), the previous map and the event mass are read from the map storage area 233s in order to continue the presentation from the previous map (S3310). ), A restart point is set in the continuous mass of the route having the nearest non-passed mass from the start (S3311), and this processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3309 that there is no unpassed square (S3309: No), a map different from the previous one is read from the map storage area 233s to move to a new map (S3312), and a jackpot variation pattern is displayed. Based on the value of the effect counter 233o, a mass event is selected and set from the normal mass setting table 233t1 (S3313), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2901 that there is no display opening command (S2901: No), it is then determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2903). If there is a round number command for use (S2903: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S2904), and this processing is terminated.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2904) will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). FIG. 119 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table is determined based on the round number indicated by the display round number command and the data in the mass event storage area 233u, and the determined round number display data table is used as the data table. The data is read from the round effect table storage area (see FIG. 86) in the storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3101). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3102).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3105), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 118. If it is determined in the processing of S2903 that there is no display round number command (S2903: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2905). If there is an ending command (S2905: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S2906), and this process ends. On the other hand, if there is no display ending command in the process of S2905 (S2905: No), the process of S2906 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2906) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit in the hold in the data in the winning information storage area 233k (S3401). If it is determined in the process of S3401 that there is a jackpot in the hold (S3401: Yes), the mass event is updated based on the jackpot hold information and the display effect counter 233o (S3402), and the process of S3403 Migrate to In the process of S3402, for example, when there is a big hit in the hold, a square that is two squares ahead of the square at the current point (that is, a square that can be reached by generating two big hits) is set as a special square (FIG. 74 ( b)). By setting the next square as the special square, the player will continue the game in anticipation of at least two more jackpots.

  Next, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined (S3403), and the determined ending display data table is stored in the ending effect table storage area (see FIG. 86) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3404). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3405). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3406), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3407). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3408), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this ending command process, the ending effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol jackpot ends, so that the player recognizes that the jackpot has ended. Can be made.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 113, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2310 that there is no display ending command (S2310: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2312). If there is a change command (S2312: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2313), and the process returns to S2301.

  Details of the rear image change command process (S2313) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 131) of the back image change accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the on state is set to on ( S3501). Then, based on the current background image and the background addition flag 223x, the rear image type (back A to C, super rear notice, door interior background, etc.) is selected, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the selected rear image type Is turned on, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the other back image type is set to off (S3503), and the process proceeds to S3504.

  In the process of S3504, it is determined whether or not the selected back image type is a super background notice (S3504). If it is determined in the process of S3504 that the background is a super-background notice, the super-background flag 233r is set to ON (S3505), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3504 that it is not a super background notice, the process of S3505 is skipped and the process is terminated. When the super background flag 233r is turned on by the process of S3505, in the SW related command process (see FIG. 123) described later, the super background SW process (S3602) for performing the process based on the switch operation in the super background is performed. Can be executed.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3501 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3502. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to a back image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Also, in the task processing (S2204), when it is specified to display any one of the back A to C, the super back notice, the door background, etc., depending on the back type of the back image specified in the display data table , The rear image classification to be displayed at that time is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the processing of S3502, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified over time, and the rear image of the rear image is determined. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data corresponding to the range is stored and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S3502, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier may be selected or received later. The rear image type indicated by the rear image command may be selected. Also, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image type indicated by the command may be selected. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 113. If it is determined in the processing of S2312 that there is no rear image change command (S2312: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an SW-related command among unprocessed commands (S2314). If it is determined in the process of S2314 that there is an SW related command (S2314: Yes), the SW related command process is executed (S2315), and the process returns to S2301.

  Details of the SW related command processing (S2315) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing SW-related command processing (S2315). This SW-related command processing (S2315) executes processing corresponding to the command based on the switch operation received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the SW-related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the super background flag 233r is on (S3601). In the process of S3601, if it is determined that the super background flag 233r is on (S3601: Yes), the super background notice is being displayed, so the super background SW performing the process based on the switch operation in the super background. The process is executed (S3602), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 124, the details of the super background SW process (S3602) will be described. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the ultra-background SW process (S3602). This super background SW process (S3602) is a process for executing an effect based on the operation of the selection switch 270 or the like during display of the super background notice.

  In the super background SW process, first, it is determined whether or not the determination switch 270e is pressed (S3701). If it is determined in the process of S3701 that the determination switch 270e has been pressed (S3701: Yes), display data of the background image currently being displayed is acquired (S3702), and it is determined whether or not display is possible to be transferred. (S3703). Here, the display indicating that transition is possible refers to the case where the specific image is displayed in the rear image, or the case where the door image is blinking in this control example (see FIG. 67).

  In the process of S3703, when it is determined that the display is not possible to be transferred (S3703: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not (S3703: Yes), the value of the in-door variation counter 223y is set to 20 (S3704), the data of the winning information storage area 233k is acquired (S3705), and the value of the display effect counter 233o is obtained. Is acquired (S3706), and the process proceeds to S3707.

  In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit in the hold in the data of the winning information storage area 233k acquired in the process of S3705 (S3707), and if it is determined that there is a big win in the hold (S3707). : Yes) Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the display effect counter 233o acquired by the processing of S3706 is 0 to 100 (S3708).

  In the processing of S3708, when it is determined that the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 100 (S3708: Yes), the rear image determination flag corresponding to the door interior background with high expectation is set to ON (S3709). The process proceeds to S3714. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display effect counter 233o is not 0 to 100 (that is, 101 to 198) (S3708: No), the rear image determination flag corresponding to the low-expected door interior background is set to ON. Then, the process proceeds to S3714.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3707 that there is no big hit in the hold (S3707: No), it is then determined whether the value of the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 30 (S3711).

  In the process of S3711, when it is determined that the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 30 (S3711: Yes), the rear image determination flag corresponding to the door interior with high expectation is set to ON (S3712). The process proceeds to S3714. On the other hand, if it is determined that the display effect counter 233o is not 0 to 30 (that is, 31 to 198) (S3711: No), the rear image determination flag corresponding to the low-expected door interior background is set to ON. Then, the process proceeds to S3714.

  In the process of S3714 executed after S3709, S3710, S3712 or S3713, the rear image change flag 233q is set to ON (S3714), and this process is terminated. By setting the back image change flag 233q to ON in the process of S3714, the back image of the door interior background set in any of S3709, S3710, S3712, or S3713 can be displayed.

  Note that the back image data is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 131) and the back image is changed by the back image change flag 233q set to ON in the process of S3714. The timing at which the rear image data is set may be synchronized with the timing at which the next variation display is started, or may be synchronized with the timing at which the currently executed variation display is terminated. good. As a method of synchronizing with each timing described above, the method of adjusting the timing at which the back image change flag 233q is set to ON in the processing of S3714, or the data of the back image is set in the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 131). For example, a method for adjusting the timing is set. Specifically, in the process of S3714, the time difference from the synchronization timing is calculated, and the timing at which the rear image is changed is adjusted by turning on the rear image change flag 233q after the calculated time has elapsed. be able to.

  Here, depending on the processing in S3707, S3708, and S3709, the ratio at which the door background with high expectation is set differs depending on whether there is a big hit in the hold. That is, the display content of the background in the door for the player is one piece of information for predicting the possibility that there is a big hit in the hold. Thereby, the player who wants to know this information plays a game while paying attention to the display of the specific image, which is the timing at which the background inside the door can be displayed. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3701 that the determination switch 270e has not been pressed (S3701: No), it is then determined whether any of the selection switches (upper switch 270a to left switch 270d) has been pressed. It is determined (S3715).

  In the process of S3715, when it is determined that any of the selection switches (upper switch 270a to left switch 270d) is pressed (S3715: Yes), based on the pressed selection switch (upper switch 270a to left switch 270d). Then, the display coordinates are reset (S3716), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if this is not the case (S3715: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  Here, the scroll display of the back image is executed based on the set display coordinates. Specifically, the display coordinates for displaying the back image are stored in chronological order, and the back images corresponding to the display coordinates are displayed in the stored order. For example, if the display coordinates are stored so as to increase only in the horizontal direction, the rear image is scroll-displayed in the horizontal direction (the right direction of the third symbol display device 81).

  In the processing of S3716, for example, the display coordinate set to increase only in the horizontal direction is fixed at the current value in the horizontal direction and increased in the vertical direction based on the depression of the upper switch 270a. Reset the display coordinates as follows. Accordingly, the rear image that has been scroll-displayed in the horizontal direction (the right direction of the third symbol display device 81) can be changed to be scroll-displayed in the vertical direction (the upward direction of the third symbol display device 81).

  As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense that he / she is searching through the back image of the super-background notice displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by his / her own operation. It can be improved. Further, the background image of the super-background notice includes a specific image (a door image in the present control example) necessary for displaying the interior background as described above. Thereby, since the player who wants to display the background in the door searches the back image of the super background notice with more interest in order to find the specific image, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 123, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3601 that the super background flag 233r is not on (S3601: No), it is then determined whether or not a jackpot presentation is being performed (S3603). In the process of S3603, when it is determined that the jackpot effect is being performed (S3603: Yes), the jackpot SW process is executed (S3604), and this process ends. On the other hand, if not (S3603: No), the process of S3604 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 125, the details of the jackpot SW process (S3604) will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the jackpot SW processing. This jackpot SW process is to execute a process corresponding to a display command based on the operation of the selection switch 270 and the like received from the sound lamp control device 114 during the jackpot effect.

  In the jackpot SW process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the SW round effective period (S3801). If it is determined in the processing of S3801 that the current period is not within the SW within the round (S3801: No), the processing is ended as it is because it is not time to produce an effect based on the switch operation.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3801 that the SW within the round is valid (S3801: Yes), it is then determined whether any of the selection switches (upper switch 270a to left switch 270d) is pressed. (S3802).

  If it is determined in the process of S3802 that any of the selection switches (upper switch 270a to left switch 270d) is pressed (S3802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the selection is normal (S3803). Specifically, when the moveable direction in the jackpot effect map is down or right (see FIG. 72A), the case where the lower switch 270c or the left switch 270d is pressed is a normal selection. Determined.

  If it is determined that the selection is normal in the process of S3803 (S3803: Yes), the pointer 233f is set so that the display moves by one cell in the selection direction (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3803 that the selection is not normal (S3803: No), the process of S3804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3805.

  In the process of S3805, it is determined whether or not the determination switch 270e has been pressed (S3805). If it is determined in the processing of S3805 that the determination switch 270e has been pressed (S3805: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a determinable cell is selected (S3806). Specifically, when the same cell as the previous cell is selected, it is determined that a determinable cell is not selected.

  If it is determined in step S3806 that a determinable cell is not selected (S3806: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if not (S3806: Yes), the determined square event is stored in the mass event storage area 233u (S3807), the determined square is added to the route history storage area (S3808), and the process proceeds to S3809. Transition.

  By the process of S3807, the round effect by the round number command process (see FIG. 119 (b)) described above can be executed based on the mass event stored in the mass event storage area 233u. Also, by the process of S3808, based on the route history stored in the route history storage area 233w, the presence / absence of a non-passing cell by the map setting process (see FIG. 120) described above (whether or not to display a new map) Discrimination) is possible.

  In the process of S3809 executed after the process of S3808, it is determined whether or not the determined mass event is background addition (S3809). If it is determined in the process of S3809 that the mass event is background addition (S3809: Yes), the background addition flag 233x is set to ON based on the display effect counter 233o (S3810). Specifically, the background addition flag 233x is set to ON when the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 100. Not limited to this, a plurality of backgrounds to be added (for example, additional background A and additional background B) are prepared, and when the display effect counter 233o is 0 to 50, the background addition flag 233x for adding the additional background A is turned on. When the display effect counter 233o is 51 to 100, the background addition flag 233x for adding the additional background B may be set to ON.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3809 that the event is not a background addition (S3809: No), this process ends.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 113. If it is determined in the processing of S2314 that there is no SW-related command (S2314: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display winning command among unprocessed commands (S2216). If there is a display winning command in the processing of S2216 (S2216: Yes), the winning information based on the received command is stored in the winning information storage area 233k (S2317), and the processing returns to S2301.

  The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 233k by the process of S2317 is used for selecting a display effect in the above-described super background effect process (see FIG. 115).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2316 that there is no display winning command (S2316: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2318), and the error command If there is (S2318: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2319), and the processing returns to S2301.

  Details of the error command process (S2319) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S3902). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3901, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3902 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 113. If it is determined in the processing of S2318 that there is no error command (S2318: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2320), and the processing returns to S2301.

  In the processing of S2301, which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2301: Yes). ), The processing of S2302 to S2320 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2301 to S2320 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S2301 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2209) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction is performed, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 114 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 114 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 114A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2402. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129, the details of the display setting process (S2203), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 127, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S4001: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processes of S4002 to S4004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4005. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S4001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S4002), and S4003 to S4004. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S4003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S4003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S4004).

  Details of the warning image setting process will be described here with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S4101).

  In the task processing (S2204), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, etc. are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S4101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4004) or in the process of S4003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4005.

  In S4005, pointer update processing is executed (S4005). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart illustrating pointer update processing. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4201). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S4201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S4202). As a result, if it is End information (S4202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S4203), and if it is a demo display data table (S4203: Yes), the display data table buffer. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S4204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4205), this processing is terminated, and the display is completed. Return to the setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4203 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S4203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S4206). ), This process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which End information is written is set. Since the drawn contents are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4202: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4006). In the task processing (S2204), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S4006 together with the warning image previously expanded, and for each sprite, Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S4007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4008). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S4008: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S4009).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S4009: No), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet, and the confirmed display effect is at the timing for performing the confirmed display, so first the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S2204), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S4015, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4009, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S4009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S4016). If the demo display flag is off (S4016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The buffer 233d is set (S4017), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4018). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S4016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S4016: No), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2209) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, a simple power-on variation image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 130 and FIG. 131, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2205), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 130A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Is executed (S4302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S4301, that is, if it is off (S4301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S4401), and if a transfer instruction has been transmitted (S4401: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S4402). In the process of S4402, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S4402 that the transfer process has not ended (S4402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4402: Yes), the process proceeds to S4403. Also, as a result of the process of S4401, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4401: No), the process proceeds to S4403.

  In the process of S4403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4403). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S4403 (S4403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 112B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2208 in FIG. 112B) and the simple display setting process (see S2209 in FIG. 112B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 113 to 126) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 127 to 129) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. Displays the normal image. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 131) (see S4301: No in FIG. 130A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S4303), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2205) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4005) of the display setting process (S2203) executed previously is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S4501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4502). If it is transfer data information (S4502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S4503), a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S4504), and the process proceeds to step S4505.

  In the process of S4502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4502: No), the processes of S4503 and S4504 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4505. In the processing of S4505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S4505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S4506).

  In the process of S4506, when an image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S4506 that the transfer process has not ended (S4506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4506: Yes), the process proceeds to S4507. Also, as a result of the process of S4505, if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S4505: No), the process proceeds to S4507.

  In the process of S4507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4507). If the transfer start flag is on (S4507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4503 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S4513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4507: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S4509). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S4509: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S4510), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S4511). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4512), and the process proceeds to S4513.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S4511, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer processing is ended as it is.

  In the processing of S4513, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4513). The determination in the process of S4513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4513 (S4513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4513 (S4513: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S4514). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S4514, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S4515), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In this control example, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132A, details of the above-described drawing process (S2206), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 132 (a) is a flowchart showing the drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2204) and parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information necessary for drawing each sprite) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2205), the drawing list shown in FIG. 91 is generated (S4601). That is, in the process of S4601, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2204). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2205), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S4602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4602, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S4603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 112B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132B, details of the above-described counter update process (S2207), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 132B is a flowchart showing the counter update process.

  In the counter update process, first, the display effect counter 233o is updated (S4701). Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4702), and this processing ends.

<Modification of the first embodiment>
Next, a modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 137. In the modification of the first embodiment, the relief timing is provided in the effect period of Super Reach B. When the frame button 22 is not pressed during the production of Super Reach B and this relief timing has elapsed, the relief production is executed. Here, as described above, the super reach B is an effect in which the jackpot is notified by pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times. Therefore, if the period during which the frame button 22 can be input decreases, there may be a case where the frame button 22 cannot be pressed in time. However, in this modified example, when the period during which the frame button 22 can be input decreases (the relief timing elapses), the relief effect is executed, so that the frame button 22 is pressed to notify the jackpot. The number of times decreases. As a result, the above-described problem can be avoided.

  With reference to FIG. 133, the timing at which the effect of super reach B in the present modification is executed will be described. FIG. 133 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the execution timing of the effect of Super Reach B.

  First, referring to FIG. 133 (a), the frame button 22 is not pressed until the first relief timing and the second relief timing have elapsed during the production of Super Reach B. The case where 22 is pressed and a stop display effect is performed is demonstrated.

  When the reach production of Super Reach B (reach with 7 symbols) is started, a screen in which the girl character at the center of the screen holds 4 symbols in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above is displayed. (See FIG. 77 (a)). In this state, when the frame button 22 is not pressed and the first relief timing elapses, a relief effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the screen in which the character has the 4 symbols and the 5 symbols in hand. Changed to Similarly, when the frame button 22 is not pressed and the second relief timing elapses, the relief effect is executed again. As shown in FIG. 134 (b), the character has the 4 symbols, the 5 symbols, and the 6 symbols. The screen changes to

  In this state, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the stoppable period, an effect of throwing 4 symbols, 5 symbols and 6 symbols is executed, and an effect of notifying the jackpot is executed. As described above, the present modification is configured such that the remaining number of effective effects required for jackpot notification is reduced each time the relief timing elapses. As a result, even if the player is delayed in noticing the press of the frame button 22 in the reach production, the required number of presses of the frame button 22 is reduced. Pressing can be performed.

  In addition, although the frame button 22 is pressed, the relief effect is executed in the same manner as described above even when the relief timing elapses without being an effective effect. As a result, even when the frame button 22 is pressed, even when the throwing effect that is the effective effect is not displayed, the effect proceeds at the relief timing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance from proceeding even though the frame button 22 is pressed, and to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player.

  FIG. 133 (b) is a diagram showing the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed before the above-described relief timings have elapsed. If the frame button 22 is pressed before the first relief timing elapses and an effective effect is executed, the relief effect is not executed even after the first relief timing elapses, and the same applies to the second relief timing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, details of the contents of the data table storage area 233b in the modification of the first control example will be described. FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the data table storage area 233b in the present modification. This data table storage area 233b differs from the first control example only in that various display data tables for relief display are provided in the variable effect table storage area, and the others are different from the first control example described above. Since it is the same, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the various display data tables for relief display, display data for relief effects such as those shown in FIGS. 134A and 134B described above are stored. The display data for the relief effect is stored in the data table storage area 223b by the process of S2003 in the boot process (see FIG. 111) of the display control device 114, as in the other display data tables. Then, in the display super reach B processing (see FIG. 137) described later, when a relief command is received, a relief display display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the super reach B operation process (S1510) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the super-reach B operation processing (S1510). The super-reach B operation processing (S1510) in the present modification includes the above-described first control example, determination as to whether or not the relief timing has passed (S1830), and a relief command for display when the relief timing has passed. Since it is different in the set (S1831) portion and the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Specifically, in the processing of S1803, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1803: No), it is determined whether or not the relief timing corresponding to the remaining effective pressing count has elapsed (S1830). ). For example, as shown in FIG. 133 (a), when the effective production has never been executed (the number of remaining effective presses is 3), the case where the first relief timing has elapsed corresponds. Further, when the first relief timing has elapsed and the relief effect has been executed once (the number of remaining effective presses is two), the case where the second relief timing has elapsed corresponds.

  If it is determined in the process of S1830 that the repair timing has not elapsed, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if not, a display relief command is set based on the elapsed timing (S1831). For example, when the first rescue timing has passed, a command for executing an effect with two symbols as shown in FIG. 134 (a) is set, and when the second rescue timing has passed, the command shown in FIG. A command for executing an effect with three symbols as shown in FIG. The relief command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display of the relief effect is executed by the display super reach B process (see FIG. 137) of the display control device 114 that has received the command. Become.

  Next, the display super reach B process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the display super reach B process (S2704). The super-reach B process for display (S2704) in the present modification includes the first control example described above, determination of whether or not there is a relief command (S2830), and the display data table for relief display when there is a relief command. Since the processing (S2831) set in the data table buffer 233d is different and the other processing is the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Specifically, if it is determined in step S2807 that there is no replacement command (S2807: No), it is determined whether there is a relief command (S2830). If it is determined in step S2830 that there is no relief command, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2830 that there is a relief command, the relief display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the process ends.

  Thereby, a relief effect is executed based on the progress of the relief timing. As a result, even when the period during which the frame button 22 can be input decreases, the relief effect is executed, so that it is possible to rescue a case where the frame button 22 is not pressed in time.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

  An effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect based on the establishment of the start condition, a display means for displaying the effect mode of the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means, and an operation means operable by the player And an identification means for identifying a signal output when the operation means is operated, and a determination means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied when a specific identification result is identified by the identification means; When it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the determining means, the effect mode executed by the effect executing means based on the next start condition is changed to the specific effect mode until the predetermined condition is satisfied. An amusement machine A1 characterized by having production variable setting means for setting to be variable.

  According to the gaming machine A1, based on the establishment of the start condition, an effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect, a display means for displaying the effect mode of the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means, and a game A specific condition is established when a specific identification result is identified by the identification means for identifying an operation means operable by the operator, a signal output by operating the manipulation means, and the identification means. A determination means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied, and when the determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied, a predetermined condition is satisfied for the effect mode executed by the effect execution means based on the start condition that is satisfied next And production variable setting means for setting so as to vary to a specific production mode. Therefore, when the specific condition is satisfied, the effect mode executed by the effect execution means can be changed to the specific effect mode based on the player's operation, so that the player's interest is improved. be able to.

  In the gaming machine A1, a rear display unit that displays a rear display mode displayed on the rear side of the predetermined effect displayed on the display unit, and the rear display mode is determined based on the identification result by the identification unit. And a scroll display means for scroll-displaying in a direction, wherein the specific condition is established when a specific back symbol is displayed in the back display mode.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the rear display means for displaying the rear display mode displayed on the rear side of the predetermined effect displayed on the display means, and the identification by the identification means Scroll display means for scrolling and displaying the back display mode in a predetermined direction based on the result, and the specific condition is established when a specific back symbol is displayed on the back display mode. is there. Therefore, the back display mode can be scroll-displayed based on the player's operation. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A2, the rear display means normally displays the rear display mode by scrolling the display in a predetermined direction, and when a predetermined identification result is determined by the identification means. The gaming machine A3, wherein the scroll display in the predetermined direction is changed to a scroll display in the direction based on the identification result.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A2, the back display means normally displays the back display mode by scrolling the display in a predetermined direction. When the predetermined identification result is determined by the above, the scroll display in the predetermined direction is changed to the scroll display in the direction based on the identification result. Therefore, when the scroll display is executed in a predetermined direction based on the player's operation and the direction of the scroll display is changed, the operation may be performed again. As a result, the burden on the player for executing the scroll display can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the operation means includes a plurality of operation units, and the plurality of operations include a direction operation unit that indicates a scroll direction of the rear display mode, the specific identification result, A gaming machine A4 characterized by comprising at least a specific operation unit to be identified.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A1, the operation means is composed of a plurality of operation units, and the plurality of operations indicate the scroll direction of the rear display mode. It is comprised at least by the direction operation part and the specific operation part identified with the said specific identification result. Therefore, the scroll direction can be changed by operating the direction operation unit, and the effect can be changed by operating the specific operation unit. As a result, a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  An effect execution means for executing an effect of a game, a display means for displaying an effect mode executed by the effect execution means, and an effect mode selection for selecting an effect mode executed by the effect execution means from a plurality of effect modes And an operating means that can be operated by a player, and operating the operating means each time a predetermined condition is satisfied as an effect mode selected by the effect mode selecting means. When a route effect mode is set in which the effect mode is changed by selecting one route from a plurality of routes, and the route effect mode is executed, the route effect mode executed previously is A gaming machine B1 having auxiliary means for assisting in selecting a route other than the selected route.

  According to the gaming machine B1, an effect execution unit that executes an effect of a game, a display unit that displays an effect mode executed by the effect execution unit, and an effect mode executed by the effect execution unit are a plurality of effects. In the gaming machine having an effect mode selection means to select from the mode, the player has an operation means that can be operated, and as the effect mode selected by the effect mode selection means, whenever the predetermined condition is satisfied, If a route effect mode is set in which the effect mode is changed by the player selecting one route from a plurality of routes by operating the operating means, and the route effect mode is executed before, An auxiliary means for assisting in selecting a route other than the route selected in the route effect mode. Thereby, when the player selects a route in the route effect mode, the player is assisted to select a route other than the route previously selected. As a result, the operation load on the player when selecting a route other than the previously selected route can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B1, based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit that executes determination, a dynamic display unit that dynamically displays identification information indicating the determination information by the determination unit on the display unit, and the display unit In the gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating specific determination information is displayed, the effect mode selection means is configured to execute the privilege game. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the route effect mode is selected on the basis that the privilege game is executed by the means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination means for executing the determination and the identification information indicating the determination information by the determination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having dynamic display means for causing and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating specific determination information is displayed on the display means, The effect aspect selection means selects the route effect aspect based on the fact that the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. Therefore, the player can select the route effect mode during the execution of the privilege game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the execution of the privilege game.

  In the gaming machine B2, the effect execution means causes the display means to display the route effect mode selected by the effect mode selection means during execution of the privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B2, the effect execution means displays the route effect mode selected by the effect mode selection means on the display means during execution of the privilege game. It is. Therefore, during the execution of the privilege game, the route effect mode based on the player's operation is displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the execution of the privilege game.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the route effect mode is set to the set mass by setting a plurality of set squares on the route and passing through the set square or stopping at the set square. A gaming machine B4 characterized by having route privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is being played.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B3, in the route effect mode, a plurality of set squares are set on the route, and the set square passes or stops at the set square. By this, it has a route privilege provision means to provide the privilege set to the set cell. Therefore, when the route effect mode is displayed, the player can be expected to receive a privilege. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, the route privilege granting unit sets a privilege to be assisted by the assisting unit so that it can be started from the start of the next privilege game from the set mass that has been passed or stopped as the privilege. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B4, the route privilege granting means can be started from the start of the next privilege game from the set mass that has passed or stopped as the privilege. A privilege to be assisted by the assisting means is set. Therefore, the player can start at the start of the next privilege game from the set mass that has been passed or stopped in the previous privilege game. As a result, it is possible to give the player an impression as if it was a rendition from the previous privilege game, and to improve the interest of the player.

  Lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of lottery conditions, display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information In the gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that the lottery result is a specific lottery result The information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings, and is displayed by a combination of specific symbols, so that the lottery result by the lottery means is set to indicate the specific lottery result, and the dynamic display means is The reach display mode in which one symbol row is dynamically displayed among the plurality of symbol rows is displayed, and a plurality of specific symbols that are combinations showing the specific lottery result are set and displayed. Also The symbol variable means for changing the specific symbol of the symbol sequence dynamically displayed in the reach display mode to a specific display mode, and the specification variable by the symbol variable unit based on establishment of a predetermined condition A gaming machine C1 having re-variable means for changing the design to the original display mode.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information can be dynamically displayed. Possible dynamic display means, and privilege grant means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that it is a specific lottery result. In the gaming machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings, and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols so that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. The dynamic display means displays a reach display mode in which one symbol row is dynamically displayed among the plurality of symbol rows, and a specific symbol that is a combination indicating the specific lottery result. Duplicate The symbol variable means for setting and displaying, the symbol variable means for changing the specific symbol of the symbol sequence dynamically displayed in the reach display mode to a specific display mode, and the symbol variable based on establishment of a predetermined condition And a re-variable means for changing the specific symbol changed by the means to the original display mode. Therefore, even when there are a plurality of specific symbols that result in a specific lottery during the display of the reach display mode, the specific symbol is changed to a specific display mode by the symbol variable means. Here, the specific symbol changed to the specific display mode is changed to the original display mode by the re-variable means. As a result, the player only needs to pay attention to the specific display mode during the display of the reach display mode having a plurality of specific symbols as the specific lottery result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand.

  In the gaming machine C1, the player has operation means that can be operated by the player, and the dynamic display means dynamically displays the specific symbol changed by the symbol variable means in the reach display mode and symbols other than the specific symbol. And a stop display means for stopping and displaying the dynamic display of the symbol sequence dynamically displayed in the reach display mode based on the operation of the operation means. A gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 has operation means that can be operated by the player, and the dynamic display means is specified by the design variable means in the reach display mode. A symbol and a symbol other than the specific symbol are dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display of the symbol string dynamically displayed in the reach display mode is stopped and displayed based on the operation of the operation means. It has a stop display means. Therefore, even when there are a plurality of specific symbols that result in a specific lottery during the display of the reach display mode, the specific symbol is changed to a specific display mode by the symbol variable means. As a result, the player may perform an operation while paying attention to the specific display mode that has been changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand.

  In the gaming machine C2, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the stop display means has one of the specific symbols as the reach display mode at the timing when the operation means is operated. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed at a position where it can be displayed in combination with the symbols that are stopped and displayed.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C2, the stop display means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, at the timing when the operation means is operated, One of the specific symbols is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed at a position where it can be displayed in combination with the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach display mode. Therefore, the symbols that are stopped and displayed based on the player's operation and re-variable to the original display mode by the re-variable means are displayed in combination with the symbols that are stopped in the reach display mode. As a result, the player can easily recognize whether or not the stop-displayed symbol is a specific lottery result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C3, the reach display mode is configured by a display mode in which two or more symbol rows are stopped and displayed in the same symbol and one symbol row is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the reach display mode allows two or more symbol rows to be stopped and displayed dynamically with the same symbol. The display mode is configured. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the symbol changing means displays the plurality of specific symbols by changing them to the specific display mode that is the same display mode. .

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the symbol variable means changes the plurality of specific symbols to the specific display mode that is the same display mode, and displays them. Is. Therefore, even when there are a plurality of specific symbols that are the specific lottery results during the display of the reach display mode, the specific symbol is changed to the same specific display mode by the symbol variable means. As a result, during the display of the reach display mode having a plurality of specific symbols as the specific lottery result, the player only has to pay attention to one specific display mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand.

  Lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of lottery conditions, display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information In the gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that the lottery result is a specific lottery result The information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings, and is displayed by a combination of specific symbols, so that the lottery result by the lottery means is set to indicate the specific lottery result, and the dynamic display means is , One of the plurality of symbol strings is displayed in a reach display mode in which one symbol string is dynamically displayed, and a specific symbol that is a combination indicating the specific lottery result is set and displayed. so And the dynamic display means based on the operation means being operated when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means. The symbol changing means for changing the symbol of the symbol row being displayed, the determining means for determining the remaining period of the period displayed in the reach display mode, and the symbol changing means within the period determined by the determining means The symbol variable determining means for determining whether the symbol can be changed, and when the symbol variable determining means determines that the symbol cannot be changed to the specific symbol, the specific symbol is displayed for the remaining period of the reach display mode. A gaming machine D1 having a specific effect setting means for setting a specific effect to be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information can be dynamically displayed. Possible dynamic display means, and privilege grant means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that it is a specific lottery result. In the gaming machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings, and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols so that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. The dynamic display means displays in a reach display mode in which one of the plurality of symbol strings is displayed in a dynamically displayed state, and a specific symbol that is a combination indicating the specific lottery result Set up Based on the operation means that can be operated by the player and the operation means being operated when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means. The symbol variable means for changing the symbol of the symbol string that is dynamically displayed, the determination means for determining the remaining period of the period displayed in the reach display mode, and within the period determined by the determination means, Symbol variable determining means for determining whether the symbol can be changed to the specific symbol by the symbol variable means, and the remaining period of the reach display mode when the symbol variable determining means determines that the symbol cannot be changed to the specific symbol And a specific effect setting means for setting a specific effect for displaying the specific symbol. Therefore, during the reach display, the symbol can be changed to the specific symbol based on the player's operation. Here, if the symbol cannot be varied based on the player's operation during the remaining reach display time, a specific effect for displaying the specific symbol is set. Thereby, even when there is no player operation or few, the specific symbol used as the combination which shows a specific lottery result can be set and displayed. As a result, in the execution of reach display, even when there are no or few player operations, a specific symbol can be displayed to indicate that a specific lottery result has been obtained.

  In the gaming machine D1, the specific effect is obtained by stopping the symbol sequence dynamically displayed in the reach display mode with a symbol different from the specific symbol, and then replacing the stopped symbol with the specific symbol. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being configured to display effects.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the specific effect is displayed after the symbol string dynamically displayed in the reach display mode is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the specific symbol. It is composed of effects that display the symbols that are stopped and displayed by replacing them with specific symbols. Therefore, if there is no or less player operation and the symbol cannot be changed based on the player's operation, the display is first stopped with a symbol different from the specific symbol. Thereafter, the symbol that is stopped and displayed is replaced with a specific symbol. Thereby, even when there are no or few operations by the player, it is possible to execute an effect with a little uncomfortable feeling.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the lottery result by the lottery means is different from the specific lottery result, the symbol of the symbol string dynamically displayed in the reach display mode is determined regardless of the operation of the operation means. A gaming machine D3 having a prohibiting unit that prohibits changing the symbol.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the lottery result by the lottery means is different from the specific lottery result, the symbols of the symbol string dynamically displayed in the reach display mode are displayed. Regardless of the operation of the operation means, there is a prohibition means for prohibiting the change to the specific symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a specific symbol indicating a specific lottery result from being displayed even though the lottery result is not a specific lottery result.

  Lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of lottery conditions, display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information In the gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that the lottery result is a specific lottery result The information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings, and is displayed by a combination of specific symbols, so that the lottery result by the lottery means is set to indicate the specific lottery result, and the dynamic display means is , One of the plurality of symbol strings is displayed in a reach display mode in which one symbol string is dynamically displayed, and a specific symbol that is a combination indicating the specific lottery result is set and displayed. so And the dynamic display means based on the operation means being operated when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means. Within the period determined by the determining means, the determining means for determining the remaining period of the period displayed in the reach display mode, The symbol variable determining means for determining whether the symbol can be changed to the specific symbol by the symbol variable means, and the specific variable in the remaining period when the symbol variable determining means determines that the symbol cannot be changed to the specific symbol. A gaming machine D4 having special symbol changing means for changing the symbols in the order in which the symbols can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the identification information can be dynamically displayed. Possible dynamic display means, and privilege grant means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that it is a specific lottery result. In the gaming machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings, and is displayed in a combination of specific symbols so that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. The dynamic display means displays in a reach display mode in which one of the plurality of symbol strings is displayed in a dynamically displayed state, and a specific symbol that is a combination indicating the specific lottery result Set up Based on the operation means that can be operated by the player and the operation means being operated when the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means. The symbol changing means for changing the symbols of the symbol sequence being dynamically displayed to different symbols in a predetermined order, the determining means for determining the remaining period of the period displayed in the reach display mode, and the determining means When it is determined that the symbol can be changed to the specific symbol by the symbol variable means within the period, and the symbol variable determining unit determines that the symbol cannot be changed to the specific symbol. Special symbol changing means for changing the symbols in the order in which the symbols can be changed in the remaining period. Therefore, during the reach display, the symbol can be changed to the specific symbol based on the player's operation. Here, if the symbol cannot be changed based on the player's operation during the remaining reach display time, the symbol is changed in the order in which it can be changed to the specific symbol in the remaining period. Thereby, even if the start of the operation by the player is delayed, the symbol can be changed to the specific symbol based on the operation of the player.

  In the gaming machine D4, the special symbol changing means variably displays the symbols in an order in which symbols to be changed in a plurality of orders among the predetermined order changed by the symbol changing means are combined. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the special symbol varying means gathers the symbols to be varied in a plurality of orders among the predetermined order varied by the symbol varying means. The symbols are variably displayed in order. Therefore, even if the start of the operation by the player is delayed, the player can easily recognize that the symbol can be changed to the specific symbol based on the player's operation.

  Examples of the member protruding from the board surface include a nail, a windmill, and a through gate.

  A gaming machine F1 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine F3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

22 Frame button (operation means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
S105 Lottery means S208 Dynamic display means S904 Bonus grant means S1813 Discrimination means S2803 Symbol variable discrimination means S2808 Specific effect setting means

Claims (1)

Lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions;
Display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means;
Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information;
In a gaming machine having privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed with the identification information indicating that the lottery result is a specific lottery result,
The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings, and is set to indicate that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result by being displayed in a specific symbol combination,
The dynamic display means displays a specific symbol which is a combination indicating the specific lottery result by displaying in a reach display mode in which one symbol sequence is dynamically displayed among the plurality of symbol sequences. Set and display,
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
When the identification information is displayed in the reach display mode by the dynamic display means, the symbol variable means for changing the symbol of the symbol string that is dynamically displayed based on the operation of the operation means. When,
Determining means for determining the remaining period of the period displayed in the reach display mode;
A symbol variable determining means for determining whether the symbol can be changed to the specific symbol by the symbol variable means within a period determined by the determining means;
And a specific effect setting means for setting a specific effect for displaying the specific symbol in the remaining period of the reach display mode when the symbol variable determining unit determines that the specific symbol cannot be changed. A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images